Rise Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/withdrawal-method/rise/ We provide reviews, ratings, and the latest news for Proprietary Trading Firms. Wed, 07 May 2025 10:24:45 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.1 https://forexpropreviews.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/cropped-Icon-1-32x32.png Rise Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/withdrawal-method/rise/ 32 32 E8 Markets Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/e8-markets/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=e8-markets https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/e8-markets/#comments Thu, 01 Sep 2022 20:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=3000 E8 Markets promotes the success of its traders in their professional journeys. The primary expectation from clients is that they exhibit discipline, effectively manage risk, and prioritize long-term consistency. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This […]

The post E8 Markets Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

E8 Markets promotes the success of its traders in their professional journeys. The primary expectation from clients is that they exhibit discipline, effectively manage risk, and prioritize long-term consistency. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are E8 Markets?

E8 Markets is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name E8 Funding LLC that was incorporated on the 5th of November, 2021. They are located in Dallas, Texas, as well as in Prague in the Czech Republic, and are being managed by CEO Dylan Elchami. E8 Markets provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations, as well as an opportunity to customize their two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs while being partnered with Virtual Markets and a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

E8 Markets’ headquarters are located at 100 Crescent Ct, Unit 700, Dallas, TX 75201, United States.

Who is the CEO of E8 Markets?

Dylan Elchami, the visionary behind E8 Markets, aimed to establish a distinctive and accessible avenue for individuals to evolve into professionally funded traders, overseeing capital from any location worldwide. He not only achieved this objective but also remains dedicated to enhancing E8 Markets’ services and terms, consistently drawing in more traders to join his exclusive trading firm.

At the forefront of his industry priorities is his commitment to simplifying the trading journey for individuals by fostering strategic partnerships and delivering cutting-edge software solutions. To ensure traders enjoy the optimal experience, he maintains in-house engineers who work diligently to provide the best possible support at all times.

Anyone interested in following Dylan Elchami can do so by following his LinkedIn.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

E8 Markets provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • E8 Classic
  • E8 Track
  • E8 Track 1:1
  • E8 One
  • E8 Pro

E8 Classic

E8 Markets’ E8 Classic provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The E8 Classic allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$110
$25,000$228
$50,000$338
$100,000$588

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 4% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 8 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that your maximum loss rule increases by +1% with each successful withdrawal you receive to a maximum of 14%.

E8 Classic Scaling Plan

The E8 Classic also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $100,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($10,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $110,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $8,000 (80% profit split of the $10,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $10,000 on your $100,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $110,000.

E8 Classic Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum loss of 8%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during both evaluation phases)

E8 Track

E8 Markets’ E8 Track provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The E8 Track allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$138
$50,000$208
$100,000$358
$200,000$598
$400,000$1,188

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 4% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 4% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 8 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that your maximum loss rule increases by +1% with each successful withdrawal you receive to a maximum of 14%.

E8 Track Scaling Plan

The E8 Track also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $200,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($20,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $220,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $16,000 (80% profit split of the $20,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $20,000 on your $200,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $220,000.

E8 Track Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum loss of 8%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during all three evaluation phases)

E8 Track 1:1

E8 Markets’ E8 Track 1:1 provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The E8 Track 1:1 allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$138
$50,000$208
$100,000$358
$200,000$598
$400,000$1,188

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 8 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that your maximum loss rule increases by +1% with each successful withdrawal you receive to a maximum of 14%.

E8 Track 1:1 Scaling Plan

The E8 Track 1:1 also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $200,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($20,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $220,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $16,000 (80% profit split of the $20,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $20,000 on your $200,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $220,000.

E8 Track 1:1 Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during all three evaluation phases)

E8 One

E8 Markets E8 One provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The E8 One allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$48
$10,000$88
$25,000$188
$50,000$288
$100,000$488
$200,000$798
$400,000$1,598

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum trailing loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on an on-demand basis. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

E8 One Scaling Plan

The E8 One also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $100,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($10,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $110,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $8,000 (80% profit split of the $10,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $10,000 on your $100,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $110,000.

E8 One Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a customizable maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during the evaluation phase)

E8 Pro

E8 Markets E8 Pro provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The E8 Pro allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$118
$50,000$228
$100,000$398
$200,000$798

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 2% daily pause or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to a funded account since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss rules. Additionally, you also have a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

E8 Pro Scaling Plan

The E8 Pro also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. E8 Markets will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Example:

  1. If you are trading a $100,000 account and you make a profit of 10% ($10,000).
  2. Your new account balance is $110,000.
  3. After you request a profit split, you will receive a payout of $8,000 (80% profit split of the $10,000 generated profit)
  4. And since you made a profit of $10,000 on your $100,000 funded account, you will continue trading with $110,000.

E8 Pro Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 8%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. All account sizes have a daily pause of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities. (Only during the evaluation phase)

Customizable Evaluation Options

Trading ObjectivesObjective Values
Account Size (E8 Classic)$5,000; $10,000; $15,000; $20,000; $25,000; $30,000; $35,000; $40,000; $45,000; $50,000; $55,000; $60,000; $65,000; $70,000; $75,000; $80,000; $85,000; $90,000; $95,000; $100,000
Account Size (E8 Track & E8 Track 1:1)$10,000; $15,000; $20,000; $25,000; $30,000; $35,000; $40,000; $45,000; $50,000; $55,000; $60,000; $65,000; $70,000; $75,000; $80,000; $85,000; $90,000; $95,000; $100,000; $105,000; $110,000; $115,000; $120,000; $125,000; $130,000; $135,000; $140,000; $145,000; $150,000; $155,000; $160,000; $165,000; $170,000; $175,000; $180,000; $185,000; $190,000; $195,000; $200,000; $205,000; $210,000; $215,000; $220,000; $225,000; $230,000; $235,000; $240,000; $245,000; $250,000; $255,000; $260,000; $265,000; $270,000; $275,000; $280,000; $285,000; $290,000; $295,000; $300,000; $305,000; $310,000; $315,000; $320,000; $325,000; $330,000; $335,000; $340,000; $345,000; $350,000; $355,000; $360,000; $365,000; $370,000; $375,000; $380,000; $385,000; $390,000; $395,000; $400,000
Account Size (E8 One)$5,000; $10,000; $15,000; $20,000; $25,000; $30,000; $35,000; $40,000; $45,000; $50,000; $55,000; $60,000; $65,000; $70,000; $75,000; $80,000; $85,000; $90,000; $95,000; $100,000; $105,000; $110,000; $115,000; $120,000; $125,000; $130,000; $135,000; $140,000; $145,000; $150,000; $155,000; $160,000; $165,000; $170,000; $175,000; $180,000; $185,000; $190,000; $195,000; $200,000; $205,000; $210,000; $215,000; $220,000; $225,000; $230,000; $235,000; $240,000; $245,000; $250,000; $255,000; $260,000; $265,000; $270,000; $275,000; $280,000; $285,000; $290,000; $295,000; $300,000; $305,000; $310,000; $315,000; $320,000; $325,000; $330,000; $335,000; $340,000; $345,000; $350,000; $355,000; $360,000; $365,000; $370,000; $375,000; $380,000; $385,000; $390,000; $395,000; $400,000
Maximum Daily Loss3%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.5%, 5%, 5.5%, 6%, 6.5%, 7%
Maximum Loss6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%
Maximum Trailing Loss (E8 One)6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%
Maximum Daily & Maximum Loss (E8 Track 1:1)3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%
Profit Split40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%
Funding Program Price RangeE8 Classic: $37 up to $1,167
E8 Track: $37 up to $2,357
E8 Track 1:1: $37 up to $1,916
E8 One: $33 up to $3,567

What Makes E8 Markets Different From Other Prop Firms?

E8 Markets differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Except E8 Pro), a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days (E8 Classic & both E8 Track account types), a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days (E8 Pro), on-demand payouts (E8 One), two affordable E8 Track evaluations, and an opportunity to customize your two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs.

E8 Markets’ E8 Classic is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. The E8 Classic also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Classic stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days, and an opportunity to customize your two-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

E8 Markets’ E8 Track is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phases two and three, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The E8 Track also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Track stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days, affordable evaluation fees, and an opportunity to customize your three-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)10% (Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Scaleable up to 14%)8%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

E8 Markets’ E8 Track 1:1 is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The E8 Track 1:1 also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Track 1:1 stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days, affordable evaluation fees, and an opportunity to customize your three-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss5% (Scaleable up to 14%)5%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss5% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss5% (Scaleable up to 14%)6% (Scaleable up to 10%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

E8 Markets’ E8 One is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The E8 One also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 One stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a first withdrawal from day one after achieving funded status, on-demand future withdrawals, and an opportunity to customize your three-step program.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFunding Pips
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Scaleable up to 10%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%85%

E8 Markets’ E8 Pro is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8%, with a 2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days during the evaluation phase since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. The E8 Pro also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the E8 Pro stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a drawdown scaling account feature, a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days, and weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target8%12%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (2% Daily Pause)3%
Maximum Loss8%6%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (2% Daily Pause)4%
Maximum Loss8%6%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between E8 Markets & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesE8 MarketsFTUK
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (2% Daily Pause)4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, E8 Markets differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Except E8 Pro), a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days (E8 Classic & both E8 Track account types), a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days (E8 Pro), on-demand payouts (E8 One), two affordable E8 Track evaluations, and an opportunity to customize your two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs.

Is Getting E8 Markets Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the E8 Classic is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 Track is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (8% in phase one, and 4% in phase two and phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 Track 1:1 is realistic primarily due to its modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase 3) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 One is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the E8 Pro is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit target of 8% coupled with average maximum loss rules (2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 4 calendar days since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.

After considering all the factors, E8 Markets is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, two three-step evaluations, and two one-step evaluations, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

E8 Markets is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 5th of November, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with E8 Markets and reaching funded status with the E8 Classic, E8 Track, or E8 Track 1:1, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 8 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with E8 Markets and reaching funded status with the E8 One, you will be eligible to receive your payout on day one if you manage to generate a profit. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size on an on-demand basis. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded E8 One.

And lastly, while working with E8 Markets and reaching funded status with the E8 Pro, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 7 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 7 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to E8 Markets payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for E8 Markets is their Telegram channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of their most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does E8 Markets Use?

E8 Markets is partnered with Virtual Markets and a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their brokers.

Virtual Markets is a company that goes beyond being a traditional brokerage. They position themselves as a dedicated ally within the dynamic realm of trading, exclusively catering to corporate clients. Virtual Markets offer a wide range of tradable instruments, which include indices, currency pairs, commodities, and crypto while providing access to the popular MetaTrader 5, cTrader, MatchTrader and TradeLocker trading platform.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with E8 Markets, they allow you to trade on cTrader, Match-Trader or Tradelocker if you choose a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions and on MetaTrader 5 if you choose Virtual Markets.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, E8 Markets is partnered with Virtual Markets and a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:50, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDAUD/USD
AUD/ZARCAD/CHFCAD/JPYCHF/HUFCHF/JPYCHF/ZAR
EUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZKEUR/GBPEUR/HUF
EUR/JPYEUR/MXNEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/RUB
EUR/SEKEUR/SGDEUR/USDEUR/ZARGBP/AUDGBP/CAD
GBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/USDGBP/ZAR
NOK/SEKNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/SEKNZD/SGD
NZD/USDSGD/JPYUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CZKUSD/HKD
USD/HUFUSD/ILSUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLN
USD/RUBUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/ZARZAR/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD
BRENTWTINGAS

Indices

AUS200F40GE30US30UK100
HK50JP225US100US500STOXX50

Cryptocurrencies

BCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 3 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 3 USD / LOT
INDICES 3 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 3 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-TraderClick here
TradeLockerClick here
cTraderClick here
MetaTrader 5Click here

Education

E8 Markets provides its community with a detailed E8 Blog with educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • About E8 – Educational articles about their features
  • Announcements – Latest news and updates
  • E8 Traders – E8 Trader interviews
  • Instruments – Educational articles about trading instruments
  • Market Research – Educational market overview articles
  • Trading Tips – Educational articles about trading suggestions, guides, and essential aspects of trading

E8 Markets distinguishes itself as a select proprietary trading firm offering a free trial option. This allows traders to experience and adapt to the platform’s trading conditions, thereby mitigating the likelihood of errors when they ultimately opt for one of the two available evaluation programs.

Finally, E8 Markets offers a professionally designed trader dashboard accessible to all clients. This feature simplifies risk management by providing continuous access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, ensuring real-time updates every minute of the day, thereby enhancing the overall user experience.

E8 Markets Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

E8 Markets has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, E8 Markets has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.3 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 2,653 reviews. Notably, 85% of these reviews have awarded E8 Markets the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the E8 Markets community member expresses heartfelt appreciation for the company’s professionalism, prompt support, and enthusiastic assistance. The acknowledgment extends to E8 Markets’ commendable reputation for timely profit disbursements and swift resolution of payment method issues, particularly in the aftermath of the past Deel incident.

E8 Markets is an excellent proprietary trading firm, with the commenter expressing satisfaction after receiving their initial payout and refund seamlessly without encountering any issues. The trader particularly appreciates the clean and professional appearance of the website and trading dashboard, highlighting their positive experience with the platform’s overall design. Furthermore, the effectiveness of the payment system is also praised, contributing to an overall outstanding experience with E8 Markets.

Social Media Statistics

E8 Markets can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter28,086 Followers
Instagram52,200 Followers
YouTube3,880 Subscribers
Telegram4,656 Members
Discord52,817 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@e8markets.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
Help CenterHelp Center Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with E8 Markets by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the E8X Dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, trading platform, account size, and trading conditions.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 5% discount on all funding program types. Please note that E8 Track has no available discounts.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and cryptocurrency payment method after you have successfully applied our discount code.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from E8 Markets, which will redirect you to the E8X Dashboard, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, E8 Markets is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the E8 Classic, which is a two-step evaluation, the E8 Track and E8 Track 1.1, which are three-step evaluations, and the E8 One and E8 Pro, which are one-step evaluations.

E8 Markets’ E8 Classic is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Classic features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 Track is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one, and 4% in phase two and phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Track features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 Track 1:1 is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Track 1:1 features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 One is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 One features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

E8 Markets’ E8 Pro is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 8% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 2% daily pause and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days during the evaluation phase since there is a maximum daily profit cap of 2%. Finally, it’s essential to note that the E8 Pro features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend E8 Markets to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as drawdown scaling, an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Except E8 Pro), a first withdrawal after only 8 calendar days (E8 Classic & both E8 Track account types), a first withdrawal after only 7 calendar days (E8 Pro), on-demand payouts (E8 One), two affordable E8 Track evaluations, and an opportunity to customize your two-step, both three-step or the E8 One one-step programs. After considering everything E8 Markets has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of E8 Markets was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 09:08 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on E8 Markets and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed E8 Markets review by commenting below!

The post E8 Markets Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/e8-markets/feed/ 35
FundingPips Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funding-pips/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=funding-pips https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funding-pips/#comments Fri, 03 Sep 2021 08:41:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=28116 FundingPips believes that traders undergo three essential stages during their professional development, Student, Practitioner, and Master. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, […]

The post FundingPips Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FundingPips believes that traders undergo three essential stages during their professional development, Student, Practitioner, and Master. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FundingPips?

FundingPips is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name ANKH PROP – FZCO that was incorporated on the 25th of August, 2022. They are located in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, and are being managed by CEO Khaled Ayesh. FundingPips provide traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

FundingPips headquarters are located at IFZA Business Park, Premises NO. 19448-001, Dubai, United Arab.

Who is the CEO of FundingPips?

Khaled Ayesh is the CEO of FundingPips. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

FundingPips provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Pro Evaluation
  • Two-step Evaluation
  • One-step Evaluation
  • Zero Program

Two-step Pro Evaluation

FundingPips Two-step Pro Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Pro Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$29
$10,000$55
$25,000$109
$50,000$199
$100,000$359

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during phase one.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during phase two.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80%

Two-step Pro Evaluation Scaling Plan

Two-step Pro Evaluation also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase as well as daily and maximum drawdown increases based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 7%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. Daily drawdown increases to 4%, and maximum drawdown increases to 8%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots (total increase 20 lots).

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 9%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots (total increase 30 lots).

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Double the initial account balance
  • Personal support and access to advanced trading tools
  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Daily drawdown increases to 5%
  • Maximum drawdown increases to 10%
  • The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots.
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

Two-step Pro Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 6%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (Scaleable up to 5%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%. (Scaleable up to 10%)
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 3% risk rule on master account, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -3% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -3% mark, your trading account will be breached.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)

Two-step Evaluation

FundingPips Two-step Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$36
$10,000$66
$25,000$156
$50,000$266
$100,000$444

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested from your funded account after you generate a profit on the first Tuesday, while all the following payouts can also be requested every single Tuesday if all the criteria are met. Your profit split will be 60% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Requesting payouts each Tuesday will resolve in a 60% profit split, bi-weekly payouts resolve in an 80% profit split, and monthly payout cycles will resolve in a 100% profit split.

Two-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

Two-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase as well as daily and maximum drawdown increases based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 11%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 20 lots per day.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. Daily drawdown increases to 6%, and maximum drawdown increases to 12%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 30 lots per day.

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. Maximum drawdown increases to 13%. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 40 lots per day.

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Double the initial account balance
  • Personal support and access to advanced trading tools
  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Daily drawdown increases to 7%
  • Maximum drawdown increases to 14%
  • The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 50 lots per day.
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

Two-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 7%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%. (Scaleable up to 14%)
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 3% risk rule on master account, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -3% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -3% mark, your trading account will be breached.

One-step Evaluation

FundingPips One-step Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Evaluation allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$99
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested from your funded account after you generate a profit on the first Tuesday, while all the following payouts can also be requested every single Tuesday if all the criteria are met. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

One-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

One-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 20 lots per day.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 30 lots per day.

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 40 lots per day.

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Double the initial account balance
  • Personal support and access to advanced trading tools
  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Daily drawdown increases to 6%
  • Maximum drawdown increases to 10%
  • The daily lot limit increases by 10 lots, up to 50 lots per day.
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

One-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%. (Scaleable up to 6%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%. (Scaleable up to 10%)
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • Daily Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for each individual trading day. Traders are required to respect the 10 daily lot limit rule, meaning that they can open up to 10 lots each trading day. By going over this limit, any open trade will be closed, and you will be restricted from trading until the next day. (Only on funded accounts)
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 3% risk rule on master account, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -3% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -3% mark, your trading account will be breached.

Zero Program

FundingPips Zero Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Zero Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$69
$10,000$99
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499

By purchasing the Zero Program, you are awarded a funded account where the first 3% profit generated on the account cannot be requested as a payout since it acts as a protection. After that, you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 1% of the initial account balance. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout can be after 14 calendar days if you manage to meet the 7 minimum profitable days criteria and you are within the consistency score range, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly basis if all the criteria is met. Your profit split will be 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Zero Program Scaling Plan

The Zero Program also has a scaling plan. You will receive an account increase based on the number of payouts you successfully qualify for and based on the profit that you secured while funded.

Example:

After 4 successful payouts and a 10% total profit, you will qualify for a 20% increase based on the initial account balance. The maximum trailing loss will also be increased by 1%.

After 8 successful payouts and a 20% total profit, you will qualify for a 30% increase based on the initial account balance. The maximum daily loss and maximum trailing loss will both be increased by 1%.

After 12 successful payouts and a 30% total profit, you will qualify for a 40% increase based on the initial account balance. The maximum trailing loss will also be increased by 1%.

After 16 successful payouts and a 40% total profit, you will qualify for the Hot Seat, which will provide you with an array of unique benefits:

  • Access to on-demand payouts
  • Increased profit split to 100%
  • Potential access to up to $2,000,000 by successfully scaling your account numerous times
  • Customized trading conditions tailored precisely to your unique trading style
  • Maximum trailing loss increases by another 1%, totaling 9%
  • Maximum daily loss increases by another 1%, totaling 5%
  • Monthly bonuses (can be seen in the spreadsheet below)
Account SizeMonthly Bonus (Hot Seat Status)
$5,000$100
$10,000$200
$25,000$300
$50,000$400
$100,000$500

Zero Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 1% withdrawal requirement as well as a protection requirement, where the first 3% profit generated in the account cannot be withdrawn.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (Scaleable up to 5%)
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 9%)
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. You have a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days. These count if you generate a minimum profit of 0.25% of your initial account balance. It is worth noting that by failing to meet the 7 minimum profitable day requirement within a 30 day period, you trading account will be breached.
  • No Hedging – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of hedging strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 10-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Maximum Risk – The trader has a maximum 1% risk rule, meaning that their floating positions cannot exceed -1% of the account size. If the floating positions drop below the -1% mark, your trading account will be breached.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The profits earned on your best trading day should not exceed 15% of your total profits.

What Makes FundingPips Different From Other Prop Firms? 

FundingPips differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, numerous trading platform options, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

FundingPips’ Two-step Pro Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in phase one and 6% in phase two, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. The Two-step Pro Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Pro Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPipsAlpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)5%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsThe5ers
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)5%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FundingPips & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target6%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)5%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary75% up to 90%

FundingPips’ Two-step Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPipsAlpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 7%)5%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 7%)5%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 14%)10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 calendar days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 7%)4%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 14%)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

FundingPips’ One-step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in the evaluation phase. The One-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPips & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary85%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4% (Scaleable up to 6%)3%
Maximum Loss6% (Scaleable up to 10%)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary70% up to 95%

FundingPips’ Zero Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is a minimum 1% withdrawal requirement, which can be requested after initially securing a 3% profit on your trading account, with a 3% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. While you don’t have a maximum trading period, you do have a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days, where you must secure a 0.25% profit in each of the 7 days for them to count, which must be secured in a 30 calendar day period. The Zero Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Zero Program stands out mainly for having a high starting profit split of 95%, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable prices.

Example of comparison between FundingPips & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsThe5ers (Hyper Growth)
Profit Target3% Protection Requirement10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 9%)6%
Minimum Trading Days7 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FundingPips & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target3% Protection Requirement10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)❌
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 9%)6%
Minimum Trading Days7 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FundingPips & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFundingPipsFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target3% Protection Requirement❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Scaleable up to 5%)6%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 9%)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days7 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

In conclusion, FundingPips differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, numerous trading platform options, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices.

Is Getting FundingPips Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Pro Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (6% in phase one and 6% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily, scaleable up to 5% and 6% maximum loss, scaleable up to 10%). It is important to note that there are no maximum or minimum trading day requirements. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100% and a monthly salary.
  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily, scaleable up to 7% and 10% maximum loss, scaleable up to 14%). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 60% up to 100% and a monthly salary.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily, scaleable up to 6%, and 6% maximum loss, scaleable up to 10%). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100% and a monthly salary.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to its initial profit target of 3% for protection coupled with the average maximum loss rule (3% maximum daily loss, scaleable up to 5%, and 5% maximum trailing loss, scaleable up to 9%). It is important to note that there is a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days, where you must secure a 0.25% profit in each of the 7 days for them to count, which must be secured in a 30 calendar day period. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit after the initial 3% requirement, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 95% up to 100% and a monthly salary.

After considering all the factors, FundingPips is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FundingPips is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 25th of August, 2022. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

With FundingPips’ Two-Step Pro Evaluation, you become eligible for your first payout after reaching a 1% withdrawal target, provided at least 7 calendar days have passed. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target every week with a 80% profit split. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account, depending on the payout cycle you prefer.

While working with FundingPips and reaching funded status with the Two-step Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after reaching a withdrawal target of 1% on the first Tuesday. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target every Tuesday with a 60% profit split, bi-weekly with a 80% profit split, or monthly with a 100% profit split. Your profit split will consist of a generous 60% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account, depending on the payout cycle you prefer.

Additionally, while working with FundingPips and reaching funded status with the One-step Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after reaching a withdrawal target of 1% on the first Tuesday. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target every Tuesday. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit generated from your funded account.

Lastly, while working with FundingPips and trading on the Zero Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after generating an initial profit of 3%, which will count as protection. After that, you will have a withdrawal target of 1%, which you will be able to qualify for on a bi-weekly basis if your 7 minimum profitable trading days and consistency criteria are met. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 1% withdrawal target on a bi-weekly basis if all the criteria is met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 95% up to 100% based on the profit generated from your funded account.

When it comes to FundingPips, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FundingPips is their YouTube and Discord channels, where you can find numerous trader interviews and payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FundingPips Use?

FundingPips doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with FundingPips, they allow you to trade on Match-Trader, cTrader, TradeLocker, or Metatrader 5.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, FundingPips is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the evaluation type and the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/USDEUR/USDGBP/USDNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHF
USD/JPYUSD/HKDUSD/SGDAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPY
AUD/NZDCAD/CHFCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHF
EUR/GBPEUR/JPYEUR/NZDGBP/CHFGBP/JPYAUD/SGD
CAD/JPYEUR/SGDGBP/AUDGBP/CADNZD/CADNZD/CHF
NZD/JPYUSD/CNHAUD/NOKCHF/NOKEUR/NOKEUR/ZAR
GBP/NOKGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/ZARSGD/JPYUSD/MXN
USD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAU/USDXAG/USDUSOILUKOIL

Indices

SPX500DJI30FTSE100GER40JP225
NDX100STX50

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDXRP/BTC

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 2 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 2 USD / LOT (0 USD / LOT on Oil)
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-Tradertnguqkawzn@investor.accessvdixe1kmpkClick here
cTradertest@fundingpips.comfpspreadtestClick here
TradeLockerClick here
Metatrader 510012234ZmSj2_8_7eClick here

Education

FundingPips doesn’t provide any additional educational content to their community.

However, FundingPips offers traders a meticulously designed trading dashboard, facilitating progress tracking, access to trading objectives, and crucial statistics. This feature also enhances risk management for a more seamless trading experience.

FundingPips Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

FundingPips has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FundingPips has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.4 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 20,169 reviews. Notably, 81% of these reviews have awarded FundingPips the highest rating of 5 stars.

Having collaborated with FundingPips for the past few months, the client expresses utmost satisfaction, rating everything from spreads and customer support to the owners and payouts as A+. They highly recommend FundingPips for those seeking a prop firm. The client highlights the exceptional level of service, noting that even when faced with an issue, the COO personally reached out to ensure a resolution. FundingPips is commended for going above and beyond, fostering an environment that encourages traders to excel in their craft.

FundingPips is recognized as one of the leading and rapidly growing proprietary trading firms in the industry. Their introduction of innovative features, including on-demand payouts, no time limits, and prompt customer responses, has significantly transformed the landscape of prop firms.

Social Media Statistics

FundingPips can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook14,000 Followers & 12,000 Likes
Instagram203,000 Followers
YouTube21,300 Subscribers
Twitter89,000 Followers
Discord153,683 Members
Linkedin16,277 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@fundingpips.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Arabic, Dutch, Hindi, French, Spanish, Urdu

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FundingPips by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your country, account type, trading platform, and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, Google Pay, Skrill, Netellet, and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 5% discount on all FundingPips account sizes.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from FundingPips, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FundingPips is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between four funding programs: Two-step Evaluation and Two-step Pro Evaluation, which is a two-step program, One-step Evaluation, which is a one-step program, and Zero Program, which is an instant funding program.

FundingPips’ Two-step Pro Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits and a monthly salary. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum or minimum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Pro Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundingPips’ Two-step Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 60% up to 100% profit splits and a monthly salary. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundingPips’ One-step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits and a monthly salary. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundingPips’ Zero Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have a 3% profit requirement, which will count as protection, with a 3% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 7 days, where you must secure a 0.25% profit in each of the 7 days for them to count, which must be secured in a 30 calendar day period. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Zero Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend FundingPips to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, numerous trading platform options, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdowns, scaleable profit split up to 100%, monthly salary through the Hot Seat program, and affordable evaluation prices. After considering everything FundingPips has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of FundingPips was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 10:50 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FundingPips and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FundingPips review by commenting below!

The post FundingPips Review (5% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/funding-pips/feed/ 2
FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fxify https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/#respond Thu, 02 Sep 2021 19:30:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=44437 FXIFY is a company identifying talented traders based on discipline, focus and consistent risk management within the financial markets. They test them through one of the five available funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. […]

The post FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FXIFY is a company identifying talented traders based on discipline, focus and consistent risk management within the financial markets. They test them through one of the five available funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FXIFY?

FXIFY is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name FXIFY Solutions Limited that was incorporated in May 2023. They are located in London, UK, and are being managed by co-founders David Bhidey and Peter Brown. FXIFY provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with FXPIG as their broker.

FXIFY’s headquarters are located at Unit 1, 74 Back Church Lane, London, E1 1LX.

Who is the CEO of FXIFY?

David Bhidey and Peter Brown are co-founders of FXIFY.

David Bhidey, a co-founder of FXIFY, has a decade-long career in technology and e-commerce, initially founding an online property company. His passion for technology and finance led him to transition into trading five years ago, joining FXPIG as an Introducing Broker alongside Peter Brown. Together, they navigated the financial markets successfully.

In the past four years, David has honed his proprietary trading skills and, along with Peter, established a leading proprietary trading firm to fill a market gap. Leveraging his background, David aims to make FXIFY a trader-centric success story, prioritizing profitability and integrity. His strategic vision guides the company, ensuring it remains innovative and excellent in the financial markets.

Peter Brown, the second co-founder of FXIFY, brings over a decade of e-commerce and marketing expertise. His digital journey spans agencies, self-establishment, and leadership in performance marketing and website development. Transitioning into personal trading five years ago, Peter partnered with David Bhidey as an Introducing Broker for FXPIG.

Their collaboration led to the creation of FXIFY, addressing an unmet market need. Under Peter’s guidance, FXIFY swiftly rose to prominence as a premier proprietary trading firm. Leading development and performance marketing, Peter leverages his e-commerce and finance background to drive FXIFY’s ongoing success.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

FXIFY provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Two-phase Evaluation
  • One-phase Evaluation
  • Lightning Evaluation
  • Three-phase Evaluation
  • Instant Funding

Two-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$89
$15,000$119
$25,000$199
$50,000$379
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,999

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

Two-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Two-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Two-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

One-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The One-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$89
$15,000$119
$25,000$199
$50,000$379
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,999

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

One-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The One-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

One-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

Lightning Evaluation

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The Lightning Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage

Account SizePrice
$10,000$59
$25,000$119
$50,000$209
$100,000$399

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 4% maximum trailing loss rules  and meet the requirement of consistency rule. The consistency rule in with the Instant Funding ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you have no minimum trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 4% maximum trailing loss rules and meet the requirement of consistency rule. The consistency rule in with the Instant Funding ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits. Your first payout on your funded account is after 7 days with no minimum amount and 3 minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be % 70 up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation

  1. 90% Profit Split
  2. No Stop Loss

Lightning Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Lightning Evaluation does not has a scaling plan.

Lightning Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Trading Days
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The consistency rule ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 30% of total profits.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.
  • Stop-Loss Requirement – A stop-loss is compulsory to manage risk and protect your trades. The first and second trades executed without a stop-loss will automatically close (soft breach). The third trade without a stop-loss is considered a hard breach.

Three-phase Evaluation

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-phase Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage (1:50 with add-on).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$39
$10,000$59
$15,000$79
$25,000$149
$50,000$249
$100,000$399
$200,000$799
$400,000$1,599

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with no minimum amount and no minimum trading day requirements, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly (bi-weekly by applying an add-on while purchasing your account). Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation

  1. Increased 1:50 Leverage
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Performance Protection (Qualifies you for a payout if in profit even if you breach the daily drawdown)

Three-phase Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Three-phase Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Three-phase Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1, Phase 2, and Phase 3 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

Instant Funding

FXIFY’s Instant Funding provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,000 up to $50,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000$69
$2,500$119
$5,000$229
$10,000$449
$25,000$899
$50,000$1749

By purchasing Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirement. You must only respect the 8% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements and no minimum trading day requirements. Withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis with an 80% up to 90% profit split.

Add-ons for FXIFY’s Instant Funding

  1. 90% Profit Split

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

Instant Funding does not feature a scaling plan.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 8%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%. Trailing loss locks as it reaches the initial account balance.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes FXIFY Different From Other Prop Firms?

FXIFY differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FXIFY & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFundedNext (Evaluation)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: 4 Weeks
Phase 2: 8 Weeks
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss10% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%85%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5%, with a 3% maximum daily 4% maximum trailing loss rules and met 30% consistency rule. You also have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you have 3 minimum trading days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal after 7 days, holding over weekend and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Hola Prime

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYHola Prime
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%65% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFundedNext (One-step Stellar)
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%90% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY &  FunderPro

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYFunderPro
Profit Target5%14%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (5% Once Funded)
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)7% (10% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Maximum Trading DaysUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during each evaluation phase. The Three-phase Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss5%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss5%8%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss5%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

FXIFY’s Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is no minimum withdrawal requirement, with a 8% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Keep in mind that Instant Funding doesn’t have a scaling plan. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, and bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between FXIFY & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYThe5%ers (Hyper Growth)
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss8%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FXIFY & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss8%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FXIFY & Tradexprop

Trading ObjectivesFXIFYTradexprop
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss8%5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)80% (90% with Add-on)

In conclusion, FXIFY differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts.

Is Getting FXIFY Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Lightning Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 5% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are 7 maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 70% up to 90% while meeting the consistency score.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to its no initial profit target coupled with above-average maximum loss rule (8% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating profits, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%, up to 90%, if they choose the add-on during the purchase.

After considering all the factors, FXIFY is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, two one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluation, and an instant funding program which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FXIFY is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in May 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Two-phase Evaluation, One-phase Evaluation, or Three-phase Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on demand. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 30 calendar days (14 calendar days with add-on). Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with FXIFY and reaching funded status with the Lightning Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 7 days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 70% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account while meeting the consistency score..

When it comes to FXIFY payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FXIFY is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FXIFY Use?

FXIFY is partnered with FXPIG as their broker.

FXPIG broker is a reliable and transparent platform for traders seeking a robust trading experience. Focusing on providing fair and competitive trading conditions, it offers tight spreads, fast execution, and a wide range of trading instruments. Its dedication to transparency and client satisfaction makes FXPIG a top choice for traders of all experience levels.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with FXIFY, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, FXIFY is partnered with FXPIG, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30 (1:50 with add-on), depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/MXNEUR/NZDEUR/TRYEUR/USDGBP/AUD
GBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USDNZD/CAD
NZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CNH
USD/CZKUSD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUFUSD/ILSUSD/JPY
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/EURXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD
UKOilUSOilNGAS

Indices

AUS200CHN50UDE30DJ30ES35
F40HKG50JPN225RUS2000STOXX50
UK100US500US500USTECVIX

Stocks

AALAAPLABNBAMZNBABA
COINCSCODISEBAYFB
FGOOGHDINTCJPM
MRNAMSFTNFLXNKEORCL
PTONPYPLQCOMSBUXTSLA
UBERWMTXOM

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDBCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD
SOL/USDXRP/USDBTC/USDTETH/USDT

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX6 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
COMMODITIES6 USD / LOT (Only Metals)(All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
INDICES6 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)
STOCKSRaw & All-in / 0.3% on Stock CFDs
CRYPTO0 USD / LOT (All-in – 0 USD / LOT)

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 4 (All In)FXPIG-Demo621238u6hdvDaClick here
MetaTrader 4 (Raw)FXPIG-DEMO625908f7YdUlyClick here
MetaTrader 5 (All In)FXPIG-Server2100170634M@R7PcKdClick here
MetaTrader 5 (Raw)FXPIG-Server2100139002wxgb2tswClick here
DXtradeClick here

Education

FXIFY doesn’t provide any additional educational content to their community.

Nevertheless, FXIFY provides all its clients with entry to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard, which enhances risk management through continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives. This guarantees immediate updates, thereby enhancing user satisfaction.

Trustpilot Feedback

FXIFY has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FXIFY has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 3,014 reviews. Notably, 77% of these reviews have awarded FXIFY the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows the client expressing satisfaction with the excellent proprietary trading experience and prompt payouts. Overall, they found the process to be smooth and commendable. However, they noted a minor delay in activating the funded account, which was attributed to FXIFY’s implementation of online contracts over emails. While this transition caused a slight delay initially, the client acknowledged its potential for expediting future processes. Despite this hiccup, FXIFY secured a position among the client’s top three preferred firms.

The commenter highlighted and described FXIFY’s services as a great experience, praising the company for its excellent rules and policies. They went on to label FXIFY as the most pleasant proprietary trading firm they’ve encountered. The client appreciated feeling supported in maintaining focus on their work as a trader, expressing a sense of peace within the company.

Social Media Statistics

FXIFY can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook56,000 Followers & 15,000 Likes
Twitter28,400 Followers
Discord39,315 members
Instagram68,900 Followers
Telegram6,405 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@fxify.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FXIFY by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, trading platform, price feed type, and add-ons.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all FXIFY account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FXIFY is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Two-phase Evaluation, which is a two-step evaluation, the One-phase Evaluation and Lightning Evaluation, which is a one-step evaluation, the Three-phase Evaluation, which is a three-step evaluation, and Instant Funding, which is a direct funding program.

FXIFY’s Two-phase Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s Lightning Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 70% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 50% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Additionally, traders must also meet the 30% consistency rule, ensuring stable and disciplined trading throughout the evaluation process. Regarding time limitations, you have 7 maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-phase Evaluation does not have a scaling plan.

FXIFY’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 5% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Three-phase Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FXIFY’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 8% maximum daily loss rule, and 8% maximum trailing loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. It’s essential to note that Instant Funding does not features a scaling plan.

I would recommend FXIFY to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and raw spread accounts. After considering everything FXIFY has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of FXIFY was last updated on 09.04.2025 at 12:10 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FXIFY and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FXIFY review by commenting below!

The post FXIFY Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fxify/feed/ 0
Hola Prime Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/hola-prime/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=hola-prime https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/hola-prime/#respond Thu, 02 Sep 2021 14:42:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=70746 Hola Prime provides traders with a win-win opportunity where each trader can access substantial capital and lightning-fast payouts, which are distributed within an hour. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading […]

The post Hola Prime Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Hola Prime provides traders with a win-win opportunity where each trader can access substantial capital and lightning-fast payouts, which are distributed within an hour. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Hola Prime?

Hola Prime is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Hola Prime Limited that was incorporated in August 2024. They are located in numerous locations worldwide, including Hong Kong, Dubai, Cyprus, India, and the United Kingdom, and are being managed by CEO Somesh Kapuria. Hola Prime provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

Hola Prime’s headquarters:

  • Hong Kong – L1, Shaw House, 201 Wan Po Road, Tseung Kwan O, Hong Kong
  • Dubai – Dubai Media Center Building 05 VD-G00-273 Dubai, UAE
  • Cyprus – Toni Marouda, 18 Mesa Geitonia, 3120, Limassol, Cyprus
  • India – Plot D-179, 4th Floor, Sector 74, Mohali, Punjab – 160055
  • United Kingdom – Office 206E, Fairbourne Drive, Atterbury, Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire, MK10 9RG, United Kingdom

Who is the CEO of Hola Prime?

Somesh Kapuria is the CEO of Hola Prime. With decades of leadership experience in the Forex and Securities industry, Somesh has a proven track record of driving sustainable growth and optimizing complex financial operations. His journey includes key leadership roles at Citibank, New York, where he consistently delivered revenue growth and operational efficiency. At Citibank, he was instrumental in the Securities & Funds Management division, leading innovative initiatives in technological and financial products that have become integral tools for asset management firms and brokerages on Wall Street.

With his extensive expertise in financial operations, corporate governance, and strategic management, Somesh is committed to advancing Hola Prime’s mission of transparency and trust. Under his leadership, the company is consistently evolving, offering innovative solutions to meet the demands of the global trading community. Somesh holds an MBA in Finance & Investments from New York, along with a B.Tech in Material Science and an M.Tech in Metallurgy from PEC Chandigarh.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Hola Prime provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Prime Challenge
  • One-step Prime Challenge
  • Two-step Pro Challenge
  • One-step Pro Challenge
  • Direct Account

Two-step Prime Challenge

Hola Prime’s Two-step Prime Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Prime Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$74
$10,000$149
$25,000$249
$50,000$374
$100,000$599
$200,000$1,149
$300,000$1,349

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

Two-step Prime Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Prime Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

Two-step Prime Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.

One-step Prime Challenge

Hola Prime’s One-step Prime Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Prime Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$81
$10,000$161
$25,000$274
$50,000$411
$100,000$649
$200,000$1,299
$300,000$1,499

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

One-step Prime Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Prime Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

One-step Prime Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 2 days.

Two-step Pro Challenge

Hola Prime’s Two-step Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$48
$10,000$89
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499
$200,000$999
$300,000$1,249

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

Two-step Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

Two-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 2 days.

One-step Pro Challenge

Hola Prime’s One-step Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$65
$10,000$120
$25,000$215
$50,000$325
$100,000$549
$200,000$1,098
$300,000$1,349

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be requested, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Additionally, all your future payouts can also be requested on the same payout cycle as the one you chose while purchasing your account: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

One-step Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

One-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 2 days.

Direct Account

Hola Prime’s Direct Account program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Direct Account allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$129
$10,000$235
$25,000$575
$50,000$1,149
$100,000$2,249

By purchasing the Direct Account program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. Withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split starts at 80% and can increase to 90% with the add-on option.

Direct Account Scaling Plan

Direct Account also has a scaling plan. Suppose a trader is profitable in the last four months with an average return of 10% over the four months and at least two successful withdrawals. In that case, you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size.

For the second scaling, traders must meet the exact requirements as the first time. As a reward, you will qualify for an Alpha Prime Membership and an account increase of 40%.

For the third scaling and onward, traders must yet again meet the exact requirements to qualify for scaling. As a reward, they will become eligible for a 50% account size increase.

It is worth noting that the scaling is done manually, meaning that you must contact the support team to initiate the scaling process once you become eligible.

Direct Account Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 5%. Trailing loss locks as it reaches the initial account balance.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 3-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

What Makes Hola Prime Different From Other Prop Firms?

Hola Prime differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, numerous trading platform options, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Hola Prime’s Two-step Prime Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Prime Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Prime Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FundingPips

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFundingPips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%75% up to 90%

Hola Prime’s One-step Prime Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-step Prime Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Prime Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFundedNext (One-step Stellar)
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%90% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFTUK
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & FunderPro

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFunderPro
Profit Target10%14%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (5% Once Funded)
Maximum Loss6%7% (10% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80%

Hola Prime’s Two-step Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & TopTier Trader

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeTopTier Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80% up to 95%

Hola Prime’s One-step Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-step Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimePipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%70% up to 95%

Hola Prime’s Direct Account is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day. Direct Account also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Direct Account stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no evaluation phases, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 90%.

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%6%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & OFP

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeOFP
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%3%, 4%, 5%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% (90% with Add-on)26% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Hola Prime & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesHola PrimeCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target❌10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%❌
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up 80% (90% with Add-on)50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

In conclusion, Hola Prime differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, numerous trading platform options, and an excellent scaling plan feature.

Is Getting Hola Prime Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Prime Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Prime Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 2 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 2 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 2 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 65% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Direct Account is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 80% up to 90% profit split.

After considering all the factors, Hola Prime is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and an instant funding program which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Hola Prime is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in August 2024. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Hola Prime and reaching funded status with the Two-step Pro Challenge, One-step Pro Challenge, Two-step Prime Challenge, or One-step Prime Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout, depending on the payout cycle you choose during checkout, weekly, bi-weekly, monthly. All future payouts will be distributed on the exact same basis, depending on what you choose during checkout: weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly. Your profit split will consist of a 65% profit split if you choose the weekly payout cycle, an 80% profit split if you choose the bi-weekly payout cycle, or a 95% profit split if you choose the monthly payout cycle.

However, while working with Hola Prime’s Direct Account, you will be eligible to receive your payout after only 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Hola Prime payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Hola Prime is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Hola Prime Use?

Hola Prime is proudly supported by its own brokerage, which offers numerous advantages to traders. This direct backing ensures that they can provide access to tier-1 liquidity, guaranteeing that their clients experience the best possible simulated real-market trading conditions. By leveraging this structure, Hola Prime delivers an enhanced level of transparency, as the company has greater control over execution and pricing, ensuring that traders receive competitive spreads and fast order execution.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Hola Prime, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5, cTrader, Match-Trader, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Hola Prime is proudly supported by its own brokerage, offering a wide range of advantages for traders. This direct backing enables Hola Prime to provide access to tier-1 liquidity, ensuring that clients enjoy optimal simulated real-market trading conditions. Furthermore, this brokerage model empowers Hola Prime to offer an extensive selection of trading instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies. Additionally, with leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the funding program and the trading instrument, traders have the potential to enhance their market exposure.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEKEUR/SGDEUR/USD
GBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHF
USD/CNHUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD&SGD
USD/ZAR

Commodities

BRENTWTIXAG/USDXAU/USD

Indices

ESTX50FRA40GER40JPN225SPAIN35
UK100NAS100US30SPX500

Cryptocurrencies

BCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX3 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES3 USD / LOT
INDICES3 USD / LOT
CRYPTO3 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
cTradersupport@forexanalysis.comIk9rnH)mq@9NjA9Click here
Match-Tradersupport+hola@forexpropreviews.comb3F#n&9u2Click here
DXtradehola_C14290b3F#n&9u2Click here
MetaTrader 5

Education

Hola Prime provides its community with a detailed Blog, which includes the following categories:

  • Prop Trading
  • Trading Tips
  • Trading Psychology
  • Instruments
  • Trading Updates
  • Traders Q&A
  • Markets Weekly
  • Trading Systems
  • Traders Stories

Additionally, Hola Prime’s Academy offers a tailored and comprehensive educational experience aimed at empowering traders of all levels. Whether you’re just starting or refining advanced strategies, their courses provide actionable insights from expert instructors with years of hands-on experience. The academy’s resources, including video tutorials, webinars, and real-time analysis, are designed to cater to different learning styles, ensuring traders can easily grasp complex concepts. Prime Academy focuses on transparency, breaking down trading strategies into clear, understandable modules for a personalized learning journey.

Hola Prime’s Trading Coaches, on the other hand, provide invaluable support to traders by focusing on the psychological aspects of trading, which are essential for long-term success. They help traders manage emotions, maintain discipline, and make rational decisions, even under pressure. The coaches offer guidance and strategies to improve emotional intelligence, risk management, and stress control, empowering traders to avoid costly mistakes and enhance overall performance. With experts like Christopher Lewis, who brings over 20 years of experience, traders can gain actionable insights that go beyond technical analysis, addressing the mental game of trading.

Hola Prime distinguishes itself as one of the few proprietary trading firms that provides traders with a free trial, allowing them to familiarize themselves with the platform’s trading conditions before committing to an evaluation program. When registering with Hola Prime, you have the option to request a free trial, which grants access to a $10k demo account to test their trading conditions before purchasing a challenge.

Lastly, Hola Prime offers all clients a well-designed trader dashboard that simplifies risk management by providing continuous access to detailed statistics and goals. This ensures real-time updates, enhancing the overall user experience.

Hola Prime

Trustpilot Feedback

Hola Prime has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Hola Prime has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.9 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,308 reviews. Notably, 92% of these reviews have awarded Hola Prime the highest rating of 5 stars.

In the first comment, the client shared that he initially had concerns about trading in another country and whether using a VPN with Hola Prime was necessary. However, their doubts were quickly resolved by Max from the customer support team, who provided clear and prompt assistance. The client appreciated the efficient support and expressed gratitude to Hola Prime for an excellent experience.

The client in the second example shared a highly positive experience with Hola Prime, highlighting its impressive profit split model, which offers up to 95%. They were particularly pleased with the swift payout process, noting that they received their share within just 45 minutes. Based on this experience, the client highly recommended Hola Prime to other traders.

Social Media Statistics

Hola Prime can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Instagram7,253 Followers
LinkedIn3,000 Followers
Twitter4,490 Followers
YouTube10,100 Subscribers
Discord3,154 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailcontactus@holaprime.com
PhoneUS: +19294480097
UK: +442045843866
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Hola Prime by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, payout cycle, and trading platform.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all Hola Prime account types and sizes.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, CoinPayments, Confirmo, PayPal, Migpayments, and Columis Payments.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Hola Prime is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Two-step Prime Challenge and Two-step Pro Challenge, which are two-step evaluations, the One-step Prime Challenge and One-step Pro Challenge, which are one-step evaluations, and the Direct Account, which is direct funding program.

Hola Prime’s Two-step Prime Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 18% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Prime Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s One-step Prime Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Prime Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s Two-step Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 18% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s One-step Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 65% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Hola Prime’s Direct Account is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit requirement, with a 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Direct Account features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Hola Prime to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, a high profit split of up to 95%, the opportunity to qualify for weekly payouts, numerous trading platform options, and an excellent scaling plan feature. After considering everything Hola Prime has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of Hola Prime was last updated on 18.03.2025 at 10:00 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Hola Prime and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Hola Prime review by commenting below!

The post Hola Prime Review (15% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/hola-prime/feed/ 0
Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=alpha-capital-group https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 05:50:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=14580 Alpha Capital Group offers traders a comprehensive platform featuring educational videos, market insights, mentoring, trading strategies, and custom-built technology. This support system aims to guide traders toward obtaining funding and eventually becoming proprietary traders within the group. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 […]

The post Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Alpha Capital Group offers traders a comprehensive platform featuring educational videos, market insights, mentoring, trading strategies, and custom-built technology. This support system aims to guide traders toward obtaining funding and eventually becoming proprietary traders within the group. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive 80% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, and indices.

Who are Alpha Capital Group?

Alpha Capital Group is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Alpha Capital Group Limited that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They are located in London, UK, and are being managed by CEO George Kohler. Alpha Capital Group provide traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation while developing their own ACG Markets brokerage.

Their headquarters are located at 10 Lower Thames Street, Billingsgate, London, England, EC3R 6AF.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Alpha Capital Group provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Alpha Pro Challenge
  • Alpha Swing Challenge
  • Alpha One-step Challenge
  • Alpha Three-step Challenge

Alpha Pro Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Alpha Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$97
$25,000$197
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$997

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha Swing Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Alpha Swing Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$70
$10,000$147
$25,000$247
$50,000$357
$100,000$577
$200,000$1,097

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Swing Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Swing Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Swing Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0001.25 Lots
$10,0002.5 Lots
$25,0005 Lots
$50,00010 Lots
$100,00020 Lots
$200,00040 Lots
$300,00060 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha One-step Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a three-step evaluation period. The Alpha Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$97
$25,000$197
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$997

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum trailing loss limit rules

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account. You must also respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with a minimum consistency score of 50% and a minimum profit of 2%, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on an on-demand basis if the above requirements are met. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha One-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a minimum withdrawal requirement of 2%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha Three-step Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a three-step evaluation period. The Alpha One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$67
$25,000$157
$50,000$247
$100,000$397
$200,000$697

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account. You must also respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Payouts on your funded account can be requested on-demand or bi-weekly, depending on the conditions met. On-demand payouts require at least 2% of total gross profits in your account balance and compliance with the 40% Best Day Rule, which means no single trading day can contribute more than 40% of your total profits. Bi-weekly payouts are available every two weeks, with a minimum withdrawal of $100 and at least 5 trading days completed within the period. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Three-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Three-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Three-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase one is 8%. The profit target for the Evaluation phase two and three is 4%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

What Makes Alpha Capital Group Different From Other Prop Firms?

Alpha Capital Group differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Alpha Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Alpha Swing Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Swing Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupThe5%ers
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The Alpha One-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFTUK
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 80%

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one, 4% in phase two and 4% in phase three with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in all evaluation phase. The Alpha Three-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Three-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, payout on-demand option, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%5%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

In conclusion, Alpha Capital Group differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Is Getting Alpha Capital Group Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Swing Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Three-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one, 4% phase two, and 4% in phase three) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.

After considering all the factors, Alpha Capital Group is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation which both feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Alpha Capital Group is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Alpha Capital Group and reaching funded status with the Alpha Pro Challenge, Alpha Swing Challenge, or Alpha Three-step Challenge you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days or on-demand. On-demand payouts require at least 2% of total gross profits in your account balance and compliance with the 40% Best Day Rule, which means no single trading day can contribute more than 40% of your total profits. Bi-weekly payouts are available every two weeks, with a minimum withdrawal of $100 and at least 5 trading days completed within the period. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with Alpha Capital Group and reaching funded status with the Alpha One-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on-demand with a minimum consistency score of 50% and a minimum profit of 2%. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts on an on-demand basis if the above requirements are met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Alpha Capital Group payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Alpha Capital Group is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Alpha Capital Group Use?

Alpha Capital Group doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. Instead, they have developed their own ACG Markets broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Alpha Capital Group, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5, cTrader, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Alpha Capital Group has developed ACG Markets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, and indices with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHF
NZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/HKDUSD/JPY
USD/SGD

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDUKOilUSOil

Indices

EUSTX50GER30HK50JPN225NAS100
UK100US30US500

Trading Fees

Trading commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX0 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES0 USD / LOT
INDICES0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5ACGMarkets-Live1189526ForexpropreviewsClick here
cTraderClick here
DXtradeClick here

Education

Alpha Capital Group provides its community with a detailed Media section with educational content, such as the following three categories:

  • Market Preview
  • Weekly Recaps
  • Market Roundup

Additionally, we can also find two educational trading resources on their website:

They are also one of the few prop firms that have an option of a free trial before starting with the evaluation challenge so you can prepare yourself and reduce the chances of errors happening when you do decide to purchase the challenge.

Finally, Alpha Capital Group grants all clients access to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard, simplifying risk management with continuous access to detailed statistics and objectives. This ensures real-time updates every minute, enhancing the overall user experience.

Alpha Capital Group Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

Alpha Capital Group has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Alpha Capital Group have a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.5 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 10,116 reviews. Notably, 83% of these reviews have awarded Alpha Capital Group the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that Alpha Capital Group is praised for offering one of the best trading conditions in the industry, featuring no commissions and minimal or no slippage. Regular and even substantial payouts are being processed, and the accessibility of prop owners, particularly through Discord, phone calls, and WhatsApp. The commenter emphasizes the unmatched transparency of Alpha Capital Group, expressing confidence as they haven’t encountered any unresolved issues.

Among several prop firms considered, Alpha Capital Group stands out as the best for this client. They highlight the benefits of low spreads and no commission, ensuring a higher retention of earned funds upon getting funded. The dashboard is praised for its rich data and analytics, aiding in trading decisions.

Social Media Statistics

Alpha Capital Group can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter63,000 Followers
YouTube25,200 Subscribers
Discord106,049 Members
Instagram70,000 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailinfo@alphacapitalgroup.uk
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Alpha Capital Group by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all Alpha Capital Group account sizes.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from Alpha Capital Group, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Alpha Capital Group is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between Four funding programs: Alpha Pro Challenge and Alpha Swing Challenge, which are both two-step programs, Alpha One-step Challenge, which is a one-step program, and Alpha Three-step Challenge, which is a three-step program.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Swing Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge is an industry-standard three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one, 4% in phase two and 4% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Three-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Alpha Capital Group to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts. After considering everything Alpha Capital Group has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of Alpha Capital Group was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:18 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Alpha Capital Group and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Alpha Capital Group review by commenting below!

The post Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/feed/ 3
Blueberry Funded Review (20% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/blueberry-funded/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=blueberry-funded https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/blueberry-funded/#respond Thu, 25 Mar 2021 08:53:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=64820 Blueberry Funded is a prop trading firm with sustainable challenges, exceptional customer service, advanced technology, and fast payouts. Backed by 20+ years of combined brokerage and prop firm experience, they provide top-tier trading conditions and a long-term platform for traders to succeed. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage […]

The post Blueberry Funded Review (20% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Blueberry Funded is a prop trading firm with sustainable challenges, exceptional customer service, advanced technology, and fast payouts. Backed by 20+ years of combined brokerage and prop firm experience, they provide top-tier trading conditions and a long-term platform for traders to succeed. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Blueberry Funded?

Blueberry Funded is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Blueberry Markets (SVG) LLC that was incorporated on the 7th of August, 2024. They are located in Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, and are being managed by CEO Dean Hyde. Blueberry Funded provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, a two-step evaluation and two one-step evaluations, while being partnered with Blueberry Markets as their broker.

Blueberry Funded’s headquarters are located at the Govant Building, 1st Floor, Kumul Highway, Port Vila, Vanuatu.

Who is the CEO of Blueberry Funded?

Dean Hyde is the CEO of Blueberry Funded. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Blueberry Funded provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Rapid Challenge

Two-step Challenge

Blueberry Funded’s Two-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$35
$10,000$60
$25,000$125
$50,000$250
$100,000$500
$200,000$1,000

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with a $100 minimum withdrawal requirement and a minimum of 3 trading days. You must also respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Two-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable in the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period and at least four successful withdrawals, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Two-step Challenge for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 10-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

One-step Challenge

Blueberry Funded’s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$40
$10,000$75
$25,000$150
$50,000$275
$100,000$550
$200,000$1,100

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with a $100 minimum withdrawal requirement and a minimum of 3 trading days. You must also respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable in the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period and at least four successful withdrawals, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their One-step Challenge for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 10-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

Rapid Challenge

Blueberry Funded’s Rapid Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Rapid Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$50
$25,000$100
$50,000$200
$100,000$300

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 4% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have a single week to reach the profit target during phase one. However, you have no minimum trading day requirements in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with a $100 minimum withdrawal requirement and a minimum of 3 trading days. You must also respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 4% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Rapid Challenge Scaling Plan

The Rapid Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable in the last three months with an average return of 10% over the three-month period and at least four successful withdrawals, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Rapid for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Rapid Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trading Period – The maximum trading duration during which you must reach your required profit target and conclude your evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a maximum trading period of 7 calendar days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 10-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

What Makes Blueberry Funded Different From Other Prop Firms?

Blueberry Funded differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period (except Rapid Challenge), no minimum trading day requirements (Rapid Challenge), first payout after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and multiple add-on features.

Blueberry Funded’s Two-step Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first payout after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Blueberry Funded’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-Step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first payout after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedFundedNext
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days2 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%90% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%70% up to 95%

Blueberry Funded’s Rapid Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5%, with a 3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss rules. Note that you have a single week to reach the profit target while having no minimum trading day requirements. The Rapid Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Rapid Challenge stands out mainly for having no minimum trading day requirements, first payout after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Traing Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Calendar DaysUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & SFX Funded

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedSFX Funded
Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)4% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Calendar Days7 Calendar Days
Profit Split80% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Blueberry Funded & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesBlueberry FundedE8 Markets (E8 One)
Profit Target5%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss4% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading Period7 Calendar DaysUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

In conclusion, Blueberry Funded differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period (except Rapid Challenge), no minimum trading day requirements (Rapid Challenge), first payout after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and multiple add-on features.

Is Getting Blueberry Funded Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Rapid Challenge is realistic primarily due to its lower profit target of 5% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that you have a single week to reach the profit target while having no minimum trading day requirements. However, the first payout is after 14 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.

After considering all the factors, Blueberry Funded is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation and two one-step evaluations, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Blueberry Funded is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 7th of August, 2024. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Blueberry Funded and reaching funded status with the Two-step Challenge, One-step Challenge, or Rapid Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Keep in mind that you will also need to complete a minimum of 3 active trading days within this period to qualify for a payout. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Blueberry Funded payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Blueberry Funded is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Blueberry Funded Use?

Blueberry Funded is partnered with Blueberry Markets as their broker.

Blueberry Markets is a trusted online trading platform dedicated to providing traders with superior market access, competitive pricing, and a seamless trading experience. With a focus on transparency and customer satisfaction, they offer cutting-edge technology, an intuitive interface, and expert support to empower traders of all levels.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Blueberry Funded, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Blueberry Funded is partnered with Blueberry Markets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:50, depending on the challenge type and the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/USDCAD/CHFCAD/JPY
CHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USD
USD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CNHAUD/NZDAUD/SGD
CHF/SGDCNH/JPYEUR/CNHEUR/HKDEUR/HUFEUR/MXN
EUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEKEUR/SGDEUR/ZARGBP/CNH
GBP/HKDGBP/NOKGBP/NZDGBP/SEKGBP/SGDNOK/JPY
NOK/SEKNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/CNHNZD/JPYNZD/SGD
NZD/USDSGD/JPYUSD/CNHUSD/HKDUSD/HUFUSD/MXN
USD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/THBUSD/ZARZAR/JPY

Commodities

XAG/AUDXAG/EURXAG/SGDXAG/USDXAU/AUD
XAU/CNHXAU/EURXAU/GBPXAU/SGDXAU/USD
XPD/USDXPT/USDUKBRENTUSWTIALUMINIUM
GASLEADNICKELZINC

Indices

AU200DJ30FR40GER30JP225
NAS100SP500STOXX50UK100CHINA50
CHINAHHK50NETH25SWISS20US2000

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDDOT/USDETH/USDLTC/USDCRP/USD
ADA/USDCBH/USDEOS/USDLNK/USDXLM/USD
AVX/USDDOG/USDFIL/USDGRT/USDMAT/USD
MKR/USDNER/USDSOL/USDTRX/USDUNI/USD
VET/USDXMR/USDBNB/USDAVE/USDALG/USD
ATM/USDAXS/USDCKE/USDCHZ/USDCOM/USD
EGL/USDFLW/USDIOT/USDKSM/USDNEO/USD
XSI/USDTHT/USDXTZ/USDZEC/USDMAN/USD
INC/USDARW/USDBAT/USDBSV/USDCEL/USD
CHF/USDCRV/USDENJ/USDFTM/USDBAR/USD
LRC/USDKAV/USDKNC/USDOMG/USDONT/USD
QTM/USDREN/USDSND/USDSKL/USDSNX/USD
STO/USDSXP/USDWAV/USDXEM/USDYFI/USD
ZIL/USDZRX/USDDSH/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX7 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES7 USD / LOT (Only Metals)
INDICES0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5BlueberryMarkets-Demo02742161+b4tSlOwClick here
MetaTrader 4BlueberryMarkets-Demo219955208l0uyuarClick here
DXtradeClick here

Education

Blueberry Funded doesn’t provide any educational content for their community. However, they provide educational content through their partnered broker, Blueberry Markets. They offer the following three educational sections:

Additionally, Blueberry Funded provides clients with a meticulously designed trader dashboard, offering real-time access to detailed statistics and objectives for streamlined risk management and an enhanced user experience. This comprehensive platform empowers traders to monitor their performance and track progress toward objectives. By integrating advanced analytics and intuitive features, the dashboard simplifies complex trading metrics, ensuring traders can stay informed and maintain control over their strategies.

Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

Blueberry Funded has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Blueberry Funded has a variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a total pool of 268 reviews. Notably, 70% of these reviews have awarded Blueberry Funded the highest rating of 5 stars.

The client had an exceptionally positive experience with Blueberry Funded, describing it as the best prop firm available. They highlighted the firm’s competitive spreads, a super-fast payout system, and excellent customer support. The client emphasized that payouts are guaranteed with Blueberry Funded and recommended it as a top choice for every trader’s plan.

The second client shared a positive experience with Blueberry Funded, noting that everything operates smoothly and efficiently. They praised the excellent trading conditions and the responsive support team. As a prop firm backed by Blueberry Markets, it met their expectations. The client expressed enthusiasm about returning to share further feedback after receiving their payout.

Social Media Statistics

Blueberry Funded can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Instagram8,881 Followers
Twitter13,000 Followers
Discord21,194 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@blueberryfunded.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Japanesse, Chinese

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Blueberry Funded by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, and trading platform.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 20% discount on all Blueberry Funded account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Blueberry Funded is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: Two-step Challenge, which is a two-step program, and One-step Challenge and Rapid Challenge, which are one-step programs.

Blueberry Funded’s Two-step Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Blueberry Funded’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Blueberry Funded’s Rapid Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 5% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 4% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, note that you have a single week to reach the profit target while having no minimum trading day requirements. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Rapid Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Blueberry Funded to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period (except Rapid Challenge), no minimum trading day requirements (Rapid Challenge), first payout after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and multiple add-on features. After considering everything Blueberry Funded has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of Blueberry Funded was last updated on 04.02.2025 at 12:00 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Blueberry Funded and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Blueberry Funded review by commenting below!

The post Blueberry Funded Review (20% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/blueberry-funded/feed/ 0
FTUK Review (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/ftuk/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=ftuk https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/ftuk/#comments Tue, 23 Mar 2021 18:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=1964 FTUK follows the belief that everyone deserves a chance. That is why they are providing traders all across the globe with an opportunity to become a successful forex trader in an affordable way. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $6.4 Million thanks to their […]

The post FTUK Review (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FTUK follows the belief that everyone deserves a chance. That is why they are providing traders all across the globe with an opportunity to become a successful forex trader in an affordable way. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $6.4 Million thanks to their unique scaling plan. Traders can receive up to 80% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FTUK?

FTUK is a proprietary trading firm incorporated in February 2021. They began in the UK, hence the name, but have since moved overseas to the United States. they are managed by the Chief Executive Officer, Nicholas Quinn. FTUK provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program. They have three industry leading platforms to choose from including TradeLocker, Match Trader and DXTrade, all providing simulated funds in real market conditions.

FTUK’s headquarters are located at:

3017 Boiling Way NE Atlanta, GA 30305, United States.

Video review

Funding Program Options

FTUK provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Instant Funding

Two-step Challenge

FTUK’s Two-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$99
$25,000$179
$50,000$269
$100,000$499

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% static drawdown. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal amount of $250. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout can be taken after a minimum of 10 trading days from the first trading day on the funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly or weekly basis if you decide to choose the weekly add-on. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for FTUK’s Two-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payouts
  • News Trading Allowed
  • Unlock Scaling Level 7

Two-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, they will be able to scale their account to the next available account size. If the trader has any profit share still in the account at the time of scaling it will be transferred to the new account’s balance at the next stage of the scaling plan.

EvaluationLevel 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5Level 6*Level 7*
$10,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
$25,000$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000
$50,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000
$100,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000$6,400,000
Profit Split80%80%80%80%80%80%80%
Leverage1:301:301:501:501:501:1001:100
*Level 7 is only available as an add-on*

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of $4,000.

Week 2: Generate a profit of $6,000.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets. (Besides the 10% target for scaling up the account.)
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days where each of the days requires a minimum profit of 0.5%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Except if you purchase a News Trading Allowed add-on)
  • Risk Per Open Positions – There is a maximum risk of 2% for total open trades.

One-step Challenge

FTUK’s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$179
$25,000$229
$50,000$399
$100,000$649

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with a minimum withdrawal amount of $250. You must respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout can be taken after a minimum of 10 trading days from the first trading day on the funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly or weekly basis if you decide to choose the weekly add-on, regardless of the minimum trading days. Your profit split will be 50% up to 80% based on the which level of the scaling plan you are currently trading.

Add-ons for FTUK’s One-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payouts
  • News Trading Allowed
  • Unlock Scaling Level 7

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Challenge also benefits from the scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. If the trader has any profit share still in the account at the time of scaling it will be transferred to the new account’s balance at the next stage of the scaling plan.

EvaluationLevel 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5Level 6*Level 7*
$10,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
$25,000$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000
$50,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000
$100,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000$6,400,000
Profit Split50%60%60%70%70%80%80%
Leverage1:101:101:201:201:301:301:50
*Level 7 is only available as an add-on*

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of $3,500.

Week 2: Generate a profit of $6,500.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 4 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Except if you purchase a News Trading Allowed add-on)
  • Risk Per Open Positions – There is a maximum risk of 2% for total open trades.

Instant Funding

FTUK’s Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$119
$10,000$199
$25,000$374
$50,000$749
$100,000$1,499

By purchasing the Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account straight away. You must respect the 6% maximum loss rule and also the consistency Score. There is no need for a long payout frequency. You can apply whenever it suits you. Just need the Consistency Score to be met at every payout cycle. Your profit split will be 50% up to 80% based on the scaling level at which you are currently trading.

Add-ons for FTUK’s Instant Funding

  • 20% Additional Profit Boost
  • +2% Increased Drawdown
  • Unlock Scaling Level 7

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

Instant Funding also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size.

Level 1Level 2Level 3Level 4Level 5Level 6*Level 7*
$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000
$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
$25,000$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000
$50,000$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000
$100,000$200,000$400,000$800,000$1,600,000$3,200,000$6,400,000
10%10%10%10%10%10%10%
50%60%60%60%70%70%80%
1:301:301:301:301:301:301:30
*Level 7 is only available as an add-on*

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of $7,000%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of $3,000%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Risk Per Open Positions – There is a maximum risk of 2% for total open trades.

What Makes FTUK Different From Other Prop Firms?

FTUK differs from most industry-leading firms due to offering three unique account types: a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as no maximum trading days, no minimum trading days, a scaling plan with a total of 7 levels and payouts on demand with their instant funding model.

FTUK’s Two-step Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% daily drawdown and 10% absolute drawdown. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Challenge also has the unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, bi-weekly payouts, which can become weekly with an add-on, allowed news trading with an add-on, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Example of comparison between FTUK & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesFTUKFundedNext (Two-step Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FTUK & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFTUKAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between FTUK & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesFTUKSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 95%

FTUK’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily loss and an 8% maximum trailing loss. You also have no time limit during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days during the evaluation phase. The One-step Challenge also has the unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding program evaluations within the industry, the One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, bi-weekly payouts, which can become weekly with an add-on, allowed news trading with an add-on, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Example of comparison between FTUK & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFTUKBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%85%

Example of comparison between FTUK & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesFTUKCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between FTUK & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesFTUKPipFarm (Trailing)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)12% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%70% up to 95%

FTUK’s Instant Funding is a program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from day one. There is only a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Instant Funding also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no stop loss requirements, no news trading restrictions, payouts on demand, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Example of comparison between FTUK & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesFTUKThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FTUK & OFP

Trading ObjectivesFTUKOFP
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss6%6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between FTUK & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFTUKFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss5%6%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 80%80% up to 100%

In conclusion, FTUK is an industry-leading prop firms that offers three unique account types: a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements with Instant Funding, on-demand payouts, and the scaling plan with a total of 7 levels.

Is Getting FTUK Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). Upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its profit target of 10% coupled with above-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). Upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 80%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with an maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 80%. Just need the consistency score to be met at every payout cycle.

After considering all the factors, FTUK is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step challenge, a one-step challenge, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FTUK is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in February 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with FTUK and reaching funded status with the One-step Challenge or Two-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout of a minimum of $250 after 10 trading days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the minimum withdrawal amount of $250 every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Two-step Challenge, while the One-step Challenge will provide you with a generous profit split of 50% up to 80%.

However, while working with FTUK and purchasing the Instant Funding program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout whenever the consistency score is achieved. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 80% based on the profit that you generated on your account.

When it comes to FTUK payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FTUK is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FTUK Use?

FTUK is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated market trading conditions.

As for trading platforms, while working with FTUK, they allow you to trade on Match-Trader, DXtrade, or TradeLocker.

Trading Instruments

FTUK allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

NZD/USDAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/NZDAUD/SGDAUD/USD
CAD/CHFAUD/JPYCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CAD
EUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZD
EUR/PLNEUR/TRYEUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
SGD/JPYUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/DKKUSD/HUFUSD/JPY
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/THB
USD/TRYUSD/ZARZAR/JPYMXN/JPYCNH/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDUKO/USDUSO/USD

Indices

AUS200US30SPX500NDX100FRA40
EUSTX50UK100GER30HK50JPN225
USDXUS2000SWI20NTH25CAN60
VIX

Cryptocurrencies

ETH/USDBTC/USDBCH/USDLTC/USDXRP/USD
ADA/USDBNB/USDDOT/USDLINK/USDUNI/USD
SOL/USDAAVE/USDTHETA/USDCAKE/USDATOM/USD
AVAX/USDXMR/USDLUNA/USDICP/USDFIL/USD
TRX/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 0 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTOCURRENCIES 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-Tradertest@ftuk.comy46jzcv3m8xaClick here
DXtrade40893402854a4uzagphfh2s3tClick here
TradeLockerFTUKtest@ftuk.comxR=b4Et+mawmClick here

Education

FTUK provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following four categories:

  • General
  • Traders Mindset
  • Technical Strategy
  • Traders Interview

Additionally, FTUK offers its clients a meticulously designed dashboard, which provides traders with seamless risk management aligned with their statistical objectives.

FTUK also have a YouTube channel showing interviews with traders, key insights, and helpful trading tips for their prop firm challenge accounts

Trustpilot Feedback

FTUK has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FTUK has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 585 reviews. Notably, 72% of these reviews have awarded FTUK the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first client with over a decade of experience describes FTUK as the best proprietary trading firm he has worked with. He highlights the excellence of the support team and emphasizes the ease and speed of withdrawals via both Crypto and Rise. He experienced no issues during the process and strongly recommends FTUK to fellow traders.

The client shared his second review of FTUK after receiving his first payout of $3876, expressing great satisfaction with the funded account conditions, including tight spreads and fast execution. He praised the opportunity provided by the FTUK team, especially thanking Nick. Vishnu also highlighted the outstanding support received from Reza via Discord, commending his patience and thorough explanations, which helped him fully understand the platform’s rules.

Social Media Statistics

FTUK can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter2,300 Followers
Instagram17,400 Followers
Discord6,200 Members
YouTube1,600 Subscribers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@ftuk.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FTUK by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, trading platform, and add-on features.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code forexpropreviews and enjoy a 10% discount on all FTUK account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FTUK is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the Two-step Challenge, which is a two-step evaluation, the One-step Challenge, which is a one-step evaluation, and Instant Funding, which is a direct funding program.

FTUK’s Two-step Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FTUK’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 50% up to 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and an 8% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 trading days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

On the other hand, FTUK’s Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 80% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements and a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend FTUK to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements with Instant Funding, and a scaling plan with the total of 7 levels. After considering everything FTUK has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a an excellent choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of FTUK was last updated on 07.05.2025 at 10:07 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FTUK and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FTUK review by commenting below!

The post FTUK Review (10% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/ftuk/feed/ 11
Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=goat-funded-trader https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/#respond Mon, 01 Mar 2021 06:36:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=25466 Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that is committed to a trader's success while also offering them an exceptional trading experience.

The post Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Goat Funded Trader is dedicated to ensuring the success of traders by providing an outstanding 24/7 trading experience. The commitment includes responsive customer service, refundable fees, achievable profit targets, top-notch trading tools, competitive commissions, and tight spreads. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Goat Funded Trader?

Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Wishes Tower International SL, which was incorporated on the 17th of May, 2023. They are located in the Canary Islands, Spain, and are being managed by CEO Edoardo Dalla Torre. Goat Funded Trader provides traders with the opportunity to choose between seven account types, three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluations, a three step evaluations and two instant funding program while being partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

Goat Funded Trader’s headquarters are located in the Canary Islands, Spain.

Who is the CEO of Goat Funded Trader?

Edoardo Dalla Torre is the CEO of Goat Funded Trader. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Goat Funded Trader provides its traders with seven unique funding program options:

  • Goat Challenge
  • Standard Challenge
  • Pro Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Three-step Challenge
  • Standard Instant Funding Program
  • Goat Instant Funding Program

Goat Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $150,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Goat Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$30
$8,000$48
$15,000$88
$25,000$138
$50,000$238
$100,000$398
$150,000$598

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is on-demand or after 30 calendar days after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a monthly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 30 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split

Goat Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Goat Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Standard Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Standard Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$44
$8,000$84
$15,000$154
$25,000$194
$50,000$294
$100,000$524
$200,000$974

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on demand

Standard Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Standard Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Pro Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$55
$8,000$89
$15,000$149
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499
$200,000$997

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Pro Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 12%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

One-step Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s One-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $15,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$15,000$170
$25,000$230
$50,000$339
$100,000$590
$200,000$1,050

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s One-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

One-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase is set at 10%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Three-step Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$65
$15,000$85
$25,000$145
$50,000$225
$100,000$365
$200,000$665

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules and daily profit cap of $3,000. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

Three-step Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Three-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for all Phase is set at 6%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.
  • Daily Profit Cap – traders can earn a max of $3,000 per trading day (excess profits are deducted but not considered a violation).

Standard Instant Funding Program

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $50,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$98
$5,000$198
$10,000$398
$20,000$798
$50,000$1,898

By purchasing Standard Instant Funding Program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is on the 5th, 15th, and 25th day of the month, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 10 days. Your profit split will be 65% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split

Standard Instant Funding Program Scaling Plan

Standard Instant Funding Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size up to three times. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits but will instead receive a 50% profit split based on the 10% generated profit as well as a double-up balance increase. It is worth noting that you can scale your account a maximum of three times, meaning that a $50,000 Instant Funding account can be scaled up to $400,000.

Example:

After generating a profit of 10% on your $50,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $100,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $100,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $200,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $200,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $400,000 account.

Standard Instant Funding Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum risk requirement of 2% for each position.

Goat Instant Funding Program

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Goat Instant Funding Program allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$107
$10,000$147
$15,000$217
$25,000$307
$50,000$467
$100,000$767

By purchasing Goat Instant Funding Program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily, 6% maximum trailing loss rules and have at least 5 trading days before requesting a reward. You also have met the requirement of Consistency Rule. Your first payout is after 14 calendar days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Goat Instant Funding Program Scaling Plan

Goat Instant Funding Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size up to three times. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits but will instead receive a 50% profit split based on the 10% generated profit as well as a double-up balance increase. It is worth noting that you can scale your account a maximum of three times, meaning that a $50,000 Instant Funding account can be scaled up to $400,000.

Example:

After generating a profit of 10% on your $50,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $100,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $100,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $200,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $200,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $400,000 account.

Goat Instant Funding Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum risk requirement of 2% for each position.
  • Consistency Rule – The consistency rule ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 15% of total profits.

What Makes Goat Funded Trader Different From Other Prop Firms?

Goat Funded Trader differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering seven unique account types: three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluations, and two instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a scaling plan , first payout on-demand, profit split up to 100%, and multiple add-on features.

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 6% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Goat Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe Funded Trader (Rapid)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Standard Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 4%
Maximum Loss10% 8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period ,weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8% 10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5% (Scaleable up to 8%)
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 92.75%

 Goat Funded Trader’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and profit split up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% 6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% 6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%85%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFXIFY
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6% 6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

 Goat Funded Trader’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluations phases. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and profit split up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
4%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% 10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss limit rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Standard Instant Funding Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Standard Instant Funding Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFTUK
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & OFP

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderOFP
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%26% up to 80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss limit rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Trading days. Goat Instant Funding Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Goat Instant Funding Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader &  Hola Prime

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderHola Prime
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% (90% with Add-on)

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%6%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%, (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 80%

In conclusion, Goat Funded Trader differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering seven unique account types: three two-step evaluations, one one-step evaluation, one three-step evaluation, and two instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Is Getting Goat Funded Trader Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Goat Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 6% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 Trading days. they offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Standard Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 Trading days. they offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 trading days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Standard Instant Funding Program is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 65% up to 95% profit split.
  • Receiving capital from Goat Instant Funding Program is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 trading days, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 80% up to 100% profit split.

After considering all the factors, Goat Funded Trader is highly recommended since you have seven unique funding programs to choose from, three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and two instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 17th of May, 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Goat Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Goat Challenge, Standard Challenge, Pro Challenge, One-step Challenge, Three-step Challenge, Standard Instant Funding Program or Goat Instant Funding Program. you will be eligible to receive your first payout on day one if you meet the 3% withdrawal target. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 30 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split with Goat Challenge, Standard Challenge, and Pro Challenge, Goat Instant Funding Program, while with Standard Instant Funding Program, you will be eligible for a 65% profit split.

When it comes to Goat Funded Trader, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Goat Funded Trader is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous trader interviews and payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Goat Funded Trader Use?

Goat Funded Trader is partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

ThinkMarkets is a premium multi-asset online brokerage with headquarters located in London and Melbourne. They provide quick and easy access to a wide range of markets while delivering some of the most recognized trading solutions: MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, and their in-house developed ThinkTrader platform.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Goat Funded Trader, they allow you to trade on Platform 5, Match-Trader, or TradeLocker.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Goat Funded Trader is partnered with ThinkMarkets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/CADCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZD
AUD/USDCAD/CHFEUR/AUDEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEK
EUR/SGDGBP/AUDGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
NZD/USDUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDEUR/HUFUSD/BRL
USD/CNHUSD/HUFUSD/MXNUSD/TRYUSD/ZAREUR/CZK
EUR/PLNEUR/ZARGBP/ZAREUR/TRY

Commodities

XAU/USDXAU/EURXAG/USDWTIBRENT
NGASCOPPERCPT/USDCORNSOYBEANS
WHEAT

Indices

AUS200ESTX50FRA40GER40UK100
JPN225NAS100SPX500US30CHINA50
HK50SPAIN35USDINDEXVIXUS2000
TAIEX

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USDXRP/USD
XMR/USDDASH/USDZEC/USDDOT/USDLINK/USD
XTZ/USDEOS/USDADA/USDXLM/USDBAT/USD
DOGE/USDSOL/USDMATIC/USDOMG/USDUNI/USD
SHIB/USDSAND/USDALGO/USDATOM/USDAVAX/USD
BNB/USDMANA/USD

As mentioned above, Goat Funded Trader also allows you to trade a wide range of stocks through ThinkMarkets. To view the full list, please refer to the Spread Account below, which will enable you to log into the trading platform and view the complete list of available stocks.

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 7 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 5 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
STOCKS 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Platform 5Click here
Match-TraderClick here
TradeLockerClick here

Education

Goat Funded Trader provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following seven categories:

  • Trading Tips
  • General
  • Education
  • VIP Goat Traders
  • Affiliate
  • Contest
  • Interview

Additionally, Goat Funded Trader provides its community with a Lot Size Calculator, which was designed to speed up the process of calculating your lot sizes and managing your risk efficiently.

And lastly, Goat Funded Trader also offers a well-designed trading dashboard accessible to all its traders, simplifying the management of risk through the display of trading objectives and associated statistics.

Trustpilot Feedback

Goat Funded Trader has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Goat Funded Trader has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 2,917 reviews. Notably, 68% of these reviews have awarded Goat Funded Trader the highest rating of 5 stars.

The client has been trading with Goat Funded Trader since its launch, having won a giveaway. They report a positive experience, highlighting the platform’s seamless and automated nature. Praise is given to the smooth and prompt payout process. The client expresses a commitment to Goat Funded Trader as one of their top choices for trading with larger capital in the future, indicating a high level of satisfaction and trust in the prop firm.

The client praises Goat Funded Trader, labeling it as one of the best options available. They highlight several positive aspects, including low commission, tight spreads, on-demand payouts, reliable customer support, and a low challenge price. The overall sentiment is that Goat Funded Trader provides comprehensive coverage for traders, indicating a positive and favorable experience with the platform.

Social Media Statistics

Goat Funded Trader can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter60,000 Followers
YouTube5,790 Subscribers
Instagram36,200 Followers
Discord2,487 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@goatfundedtrader.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Spanish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Goat Funded Trader by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your swap preference, account type, trading platform, account size, and add-on features.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 12% discount on all Goat Funded Trader account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, CentroBill, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Goat Funded Trader is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between seven funding programs: the Goat, Standard, and Pro Challenge, which are a two-step evaluation, One-step Challenge, which are a one-step, Three-step Challenge, which are a three-step, Standard Instant Program Funding and Goat Instant Program Funding, which are a direct funding program.

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 Trading days in each evaluation phase.

On the other hand, Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 65% up to 95% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Standard Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

On the other hand, Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 80% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that Goat Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Goat Funded Trader to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features. After considering everything Goat Funded Trader has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of Goat Funded Trader was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:30 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Goat Funded Trader and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Goat Funded Trader review by commenting below!

The post Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/feed/ 0
RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=rebelsfunding https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/#respond Mon, 06 Jul 2020 14:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=39635 RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished […]

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are RebelsFunding?

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name RIFM, S.R.O., that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They are located in Bratislava, Slovak Republic, and are being managed by CEO Marek Soska. RebelsFunding provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

RebelsFunding headquarters are located at Landererova 8, Bratislava – Staré Mesto 811 09, Slovak Republic.

Who is the CEO of RebelsFunding?

Marek Soska is the CEO of RebelsFunding. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video review

Funding Program Options

RebelsFunding provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Copper Program
  • Bronze Program
  • Silver Program
  • Gold Program
  • Diamond Program

Copper Program

RebelsFunding Copper Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $320,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the four-step evaluation period. The Copper Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$28
$10,000$44
$20,000$77
$40,000$135
$80,000$259
$160,000$499
$320,000$939

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase four.

Evaluation phase four requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase four. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all four evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Copper Program Scaling Plan

The Copper Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 15% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Copper Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Copper Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the four evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 4 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Bronze Program

RebelsFunding Bronze Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $160,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Bronze Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$42
$10,000$64
$20,000$104
$40,000$179
$80,000$344
$160,000$669

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Bronze Program Scaling Plan

The Bronze Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 15% over the three-month period or a 5% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Bronze Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Bronze Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the three evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Silver Program

RebelsFunding Silver Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $80,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Silver Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$35
$5,000$50
$10,000$80
$20,000$130
$40,000$230
$80,000$420

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Silver Program Scaling Plan

The Silver Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Silver Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Silver Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 6 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Gold Program

RebelsFunding Gold Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $40,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Gold Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$50
$5,000$70
$10,000$100
$20,000$160
$40,000$280

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Gold Program Scaling Plan

The Gold Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Gold Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Gold Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 8 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Diamond Program

RebelsFunding Diamond Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,000 up to $20,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Diamond Program allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000$50
$2,000$100
$5,000$190
$10,000$360
$20,000$690

By purchasing the Diamond Program, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must also respect the 6% maximum loss rule while being required to execute a minimum of five trades to qualify for a payout. Your first payout is once you manage to secure a 10% profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted once you manage to secure a minimum profit of 5% and upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will be 75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Diamond Program Scaling Plan

The Diamon Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $20,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $32,000.

Diamond Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for phase one is 10%. After the first level, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes RebelsFunding Different From Other Prop Firms?

RebelsFunding differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Program prices.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete four phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the four evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. The Copper Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Copper Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the three evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. The Bronze Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Bronze Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss10%5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%50% up to 100%

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. The Silver Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Silver Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 90%

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in each evaluation phase. The Gold Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Gold Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 92.75%

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades during each payout cycle. The Diamond Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Diamond Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, no evaluation phases, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & OFP

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingOFP
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss6%6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, RebelsFunding differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs.

Is Getting RebelsFunding Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Copper Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all four evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of four trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Bronze Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all three evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Silver Program is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of six trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Gold Program is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of eight trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Diamond Program is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with an average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75%.

After considering all the factors, RebelsFunding is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Copper, Bronze, Silver, or Gold Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Copper or Bronze Program, while the Silver and Gold Program will provide you with a generous profit split of 75% up to 90%.

However, while working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Diamond Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to generate a 10% profit. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you manage to generate a minimum profit of 5% or upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will consist of a generous 75% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Diamond Program.

When it comes to RebelsFunding payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for RebelsFunding is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does RebelsFunding Use?

RebelsFunding doesn’t trade with common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with RebelsFunding, they allow you to trade on RF-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, RebelsFunding is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:200, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZK
EUR/GBPEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLN
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZD
GBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/CZKUSD/HUFUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOK
USD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD1NGAS
1USO

Indices

USTECDE30DJ30F40JPN225
STOXX50UK100US500

Stocks

AAPLAMZNBACSCOFB
GOOGHPQIBMNFLXTSLA

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDTSOL/USDTBTC/USDTDOGE/USDT
ETH/USDTLTC/USDTNEO/USDT

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
COMMODITIES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
INDICES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
CRYPTO 2 USD per $100,000 Capital

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
RF-TraderguestROPreviews1Click here

Education

RebelsFunding provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as:

  • Educational Articles
  • Company Updates
  • Other Articles

RebelsFunding distinguishes itself as a unique proprietary trading company offering a complimentary trial option. This allows traders to acquaint themselves with and adapt to the platform’s trading conditions, minimizing the likelihood of errors when they eventually opt for one of the five available evaluation programs.

Lastly, RebelsFunding grants all clients entry to a trader dashboard meticulously crafted by professionals. This functionality simplifies risk management by providing continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, guaranteeing real-time updates.

RebelsFunding Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

RebelsFunding has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On TrustpilotRebelsFunding has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.3 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,473 reviews. Notably, 68% of these reviews have awarded RebelsFunding the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows us RebelsFunding being praised as one of the best prop firms, offering one of the best rates and lowest commissions in the industry. The client expresses admiration for the amazing customer support. They highlight the advantage of a 1:200 leverage, emphasizing its potential for earning significant profits. The client also shares their positive experience, currently holding a 10,000 Bronze Program with love for RebelsFunding.

RebelsFunding stands out as one of a few prop firms that provide open access and freedom for everyone to trade in the market. The client appreciates their affordable programs, emphasizing that any individual can participate. They praise the favorable conditions and supportive customer care, suggesting that even in the event of an account setback, it’s worth pursuing another account with RebelsFunding due to the bright future they envision.

Social Media Statistics

RebelsFunding can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook9,400 Followers & 5,800 Likes
Twitter5,864 Followers
Instagram11,300 Followers
YouTube1,730 Subscribers
TikTok617 Followers & 746 Likes
Telegram1,754 Members
Discord15,727 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@rebelsfunding.com
Phone+421 911 611 250
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Czech, Portuguese, Slovak, Swahili, Thai, Vietnamese

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with RebelsFunding by filling out the registration form with your personal details.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, cryptocurrency, and bank wire transfer payment methods.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all RebelsFunding account types.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from RebelsFunding, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, RebelsFunding is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Copper Program, which is a four-step evaluation, the Bronze Program, which is a three-step evaluation, the Silver Program, which is a two-step evaluation, the Gold Program, which is a one-step evaluation, and the Diamond Program, which is an instant funding program.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires the completion of four phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all four evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Copper Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Bronze Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Silver Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Gold Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 75% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for phase one, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades within each payout cycle. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Diamond Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend RebelsFunding to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs. After considering everything RebelsFunding offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of RebelsFunding was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 09:37 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on RebelsFunding and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed RebelsFunding review by commenting below!

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/feed/ 0
PipFarm Review (20% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/pipfarm/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=pipfarm https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/pipfarm/#respond Wed, 24 Jun 2020 08:57:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=43854 PipFarm is a proprietary trading firm that offers traders the opportunity to join and trade their capital. The company is not all about funding. It prioritizes trader growth, provides support, and celebrates traders’ milestones. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up […]

The post PipFarm Review (20% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

PipFarm is a proprietary trading firm that offers traders the opportunity to join and trade their capital. The company is not all about funding. It prioritizes trader growth, provides support, and celebrates traders’ milestones. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are PipFarm?

PipFarm is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name ECI Ventures Pte. Ltd., which was incorporated in June 2023. They are located in Singapore, and are being managed by CEO James Glyde. PipFarm provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three funding programs, a two-step evaluation and two one-step evaluations while being partnered with TopFX as their broker.

PipFarm’s headquarters are located at 68 Circular Road #02-01, 049422, Singapore.

Who is the CEO of PipFarm?

James Glyde is the CEO of PipFarm. He is a former cTrader executive who extends over a decade of experience at the head of the online trading industry. He has worked alongside numerous well-established entities, meaning that he has an in-depth understanding of the entire online trading space.

That said, you can expect James to apply his previous experience in product development, corporate governance, as well as risk management to ensure that PipFarm exceeds the expectations of every single trader.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

PipFarm provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Evaluation
  • Static Evaluation
  • Trailing Evaluation

Two-step Evaluation

PipFarm’s Two-step Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Evaluation allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30 (1:50 leverage by reaching the 50 XP milestone).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$100
$20,000$150
$50,000$300
$100,000$550
$200,000$1,100
$300,000$1,550

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 9% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 9% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 3% of the initial account balance. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 9% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after 3-5 profitable trading days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your payouts will consist of 70% up to 95% based on the profit you earn on your funded account. Additionally, keep in mind that you have a maximum time limit of 365 days to scale your funded account to the next stage.

Profit Split Ranking

If a funded account has generated a profit between 0-3%, your profit split is 70%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 3-6%, your profit split is 75%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 6-9%, your profit split is 80%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 9-12%, your profit split is 85%.

If a funded account has generated a profit of over 12%, your profit split is 90%.

Two-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

Two-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 12% profit target within a 30 calendar day period, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits. Additionally, keep in mind that you have a maximum time limit of 365 days to scale your funded account to the next stage. After reaching Series D, you will reach the maximum allocation capital. Your only requirement from there will be that you will have to request a minimum of 1 withdrawal every 365 days.

Two-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 6%, whereas Phase 2 also requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement, which can be decreased to 1% through the XP Feature Ranks.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (Scaleable up to 5% through the XP Feature Ranks)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 9%. (Scaleable up to 10% through the XP Feature Ranks)
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. In both evaluation phases, as well as once funded, you will have a minimum trading day requirement of 2-5 days, where you must make a profit of 0.5% per day. ($5k – $20k accounts require 3 days, $50k – $100k accounts require 3 days, $200k account requires 4 days, and $300k account requires 5 days)

Static Evaluation

PipFarm’s Static Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Static Evaluation allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30 (1:50 leverage by reaching the 50 XP milestone).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$100
$20,000$150
$50,000$300
$100,000$550
$200,000$1,100
$300,000$1,550

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 12% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 3% of the initial account balance. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after 3-5 profitable trading days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your payouts will consist of 70% up to 95% based on the profit you earn on your funded account. Additionally, keep in mind that you have a maximum time limit of 365 days to scale your funded account to the next stage.

Profit Split Ranking

If a funded account has generated a profit between 0-3%, your profit split is 70%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 3-6%, your profit split is 75%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 6-9%, your profit split is 80%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 9-12%, your profit split is 85%.

If a funded account has generated a profit of over 12%, your profit split is 90%.

Static Evaluation Scaling Plan

Static Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 12% profit target within a 30 calendar day period, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits. Additionally, keep in mind that you have a maximum time limit of 365 days to scale your funded account to the next stage. After reaching Series D, you will reach the maximum allocation capital. Your only requirement from there will be that you will have to request a minimum of 1 withdrawal every 365 days.

Static Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 12%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement, which can be decreased to 1% through the XP Feature Ranks.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (Scaleable up to 5% through the XP Feature Ranks)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%. (Scaleable up to 7% through the XP Feature Ranks)
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. In the evaluation phase, as well as once funded, you will have a minimum trading day requirement of 2-5 days, where you must make a profit of 0.5% per day. ($5k – $20k accounts require 3 days, $50k – $100k accounts require 3 days, $200k account requires 4 days, and $300k account requires 5 days)

Trailing Evaluation

PipFarm’s Trailing Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Trailing Evaluation allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30 (1:50 leverage by reaching the 50 XP milestone).

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$100
$20,000$150
$50,000$300
$100,000$550
$200,000$1,100
$300,000$1,550

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 12% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 12% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 3% of the initial account balance. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 12% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is after 3-5 profitable trading days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your payouts will consist of 70% up to 95% based on the profit you earn on your funded account. Additionally, keep in mind that you have a maximum time limit of 365 days to scale your funded account to the next stage.

Profit Split Ranking

If a funded account has generated a profit between 0-3%, your profit split is 70%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 3-6%, your profit split is 75%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 6-9%, your profit split is 80%.

If a funded account has generated a profit between 9-12%, your profit split is 85%.

If a funded account has generated a profit of over 12%, your profit split is 90%.

Trailing Evaluation Scaling Plan

Trailing Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 12% profit target within a 30 calendar day period, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits. Additionally, keep in mind that you have a maximum time limit of 365 days to scale your funded account to the next stage. After reaching Series D, you will reach the maximum allocation capital. Your only requirement from there will be that you will have to request a minimum of 1 withdrawal every 365 days.

Trailing Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 12%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement, which can be decreased to 1% through the XP Feature Ranks.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (Scaleable up to 5% through the XP Feature Ranks)
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. However, compared to other prop firms, PipFarm resets the highest achieved account balance to the balance after withdrawal when requesting a payout, so you don’t get penalized for withdrawing your profits. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 12%. (Scaleable up to 13% through the XP Feature Ranks)
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. In the evaluation phase, as well as once funded, you will have a minimum trading day requirement of 3-5 days, where you must make a profit of 0.5% per day. ($5k – $20k accounts require 3 days, $50k – $100k accounts require 3 days, $200k account requires 4 days, and $300k account requires 5 days)

XP Feature

The XP feature has been implemented to empower traders while trading and unlock power-ups as well as additional rewards with each rank until you reach the final 5th rank. Earning XP can be done in numerous ways while trading with PipFarm.

How To Earn XP?

RequirementXP Reward
Start an Evaluation1 XP
Get 1 Extra XP on Payouts (One Time Quest)1 XP
Pass KYC Process2 XP
Pass an Evaluation3 XP
Receive a Payout1 XP
Scale to Level 22 XP
Scale to Level 33 XP
Scale to Level 44 XP
Make an Overall Profit of 200 Pips on Your Account (One Time Quest)2 XP
Be Profitable for 5 Consecutive Days on Your Account (One Time Quest)2 XP
Execute a Single Trade With a 50 Pip Profit (One Time Quest)1 XP

XP Milestones

Now that you understand how you can earn XP, take a look below to see what certain milestones award you with.

MilestoneRequired XPAwarded Power-Ups
Rank 110 XP– 75% Profit Share (Increased from 70%)
– 28-Day Inactivity Period (Increased from 14-Days)
– 50% Lower Commissions (Decreased from $6/Lot)
– Weekly Payouts (Reduced from Bi-weekly Payouts)
Rank 225 XP– 80% Profit Share (Increased from 75%)
– 10% Capital Boost (10% Capital Added to Your Starting Balance)
– 2% Minimum Payout Requirement (Reduced from 3%)
– 5% Lifetime Discount on Challenges
– 4% Maximum Daily Loss (Increased from 3%)
Rank 350 XP– 1:50 Max Leverage (Increased from 1:30)
– 85% Profit Share (Increased from 80%)
– No Commissions (Completely Removes Commission Fees)
– 10% Lifetime Discount on Challenges
– Free $20k Evaluation Account
Rank 4100 XP– +1% Maximum Loss (Static Increases to 7%, Trailing Increases to 13%)
– 90% Profit Share (Increased from 85%)
– 1% Minimum Payout Requirement (Reduced from 2%)
– 15% Lifetime Discount on Challenges
– Free $50k Evaluation Account
Rank 5200 XP– 5% Maximum Daily Loss (Increased from 4%)
– 95% Profit Share (Increased from 90%)
– Daily Payouts (Reduced from Weekly Payouts)
– 100% Scaling Increment (Increased from 50%)
– Free $100k Evaluation Account

Kill Switch Feature

What Makes PipFarm Different From Other Prop Firms?

PipFarm differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering three funding programs, a two-step evaluation and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as a year-long trading period, a static maximum loss rule on Two-step Evaluation and Static Evaluation, bi-weekly payouts, which can become on-demand payouts, a kill switch feature for easier risk management, and a unique XP ranking feature, providing traders with an opportunity to benefit whenever they reach a certain milestone.

PipFarm’s Two-step Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in both evaluation phases, with a 3% maximum daily and 9% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during both evaluation phases. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase, depending on the account size. The Two-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having a year-long trading period, a static maximum loss rule, bi-weekly payouts, which can become on-demand payouts, and a unique XP ranking feature, providing traders with an opportunity to benefit whenever they reach a certain milestone.

Example of comparison between PipFarm & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmFundedNext (Two-step Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between PipFarm & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between PipFarm & TopTier Trader

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmTopTier Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target6%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%80% up to 90%

PipFarm’s Static Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 12%, with a 3% maximum daily and 12% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase, depending on the account size. Static Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Static Evaluation stands out mainly for having a year-long trading period, a static maximum loss rule, bi-weekly payouts, which can become on-demand payouts, and a unique XP ranking feature, providing traders with an opportunity to benefit whenever they reach a certain milestone.

Example of comparison between PipFarm & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmBlue Guardian
Profit Target12%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%85%

Example of comparison between PipFarm & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target12%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between PipFarm & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmFXIFY
Profit Target12%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%75% up to 90%

PipFarm’s Trailing Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 12%, with a 3% maximum daily and 12% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase, depending on the account size. Trailing Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Trailing Evaluation stands out mainly for having a year-long trading period, bi-weekly payouts, which can become on-demand payouts, and a unique XP ranking feature, providing traders with an opportunity to benefit whenever they reach a certain milestone.

Example of comparison between PipFarm & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmFTUK
Profit Target12%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss12% (Trailing)8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between PipFarm & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target12%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss12% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between PipFarm & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesPipFarmMyFundedFX
Profit Target12%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss12% (Trailing)6% (Trailing) (Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading Days2, 3, 4, or 5 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split70% up to 95%80% up to 92.75%

In conclusion, PipFarm differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering three funding programs, a two-step evaluation and two one-step evaluations. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as a year-long trading period, a static maximum loss rule on Two-step Evaluation and Static Evaluation, bi-weekly payouts, which can become on-demand payouts, a kill switch feature for easier risk management, and a unique XP ranking feature, providing traders with an opportunity to benefit whenever they reach a certain milestone.

Is Getting PipFarm Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (6% in both evaluation phases) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 9% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 2-5 calendar days, depending on the account size. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 70% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Static Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its slightly above-average profit target of 12% coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 2-5 calendar days, depending on the account size. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 70% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Trailing Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its slightly above-average profit target of 12% coupled with above-average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 12% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum profitable trading day requirement of 2-5 calendar days, depending on the account size. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 70% up to 95%.

After considering all the factors, PipFarm is highly recommended since you have three funding programs to choose from, which feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

PipFarm is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in June 2023. They are a company that has been developed by James Glyde, who is a former cTrader executive who extends over a decade of experience at the head of the online trading industry. He has worked alongside numerous well-established entities, meaning that he has an in-depth understanding of the entire online trading space.

While working with PipFarm and reaching funded status with the Two-step Evaluation, Static Evaluation, or Trailing Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after reaching a withdrawal target of 3% and 3 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 3% withdrawal target every 14 calendar days. Additionally, you will also have the opportunity to qualify for on-demand payouts with a minimum withdrawal requirement of1% through the XP feature. Your profit split will consist of a generous 70% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to PipFarm payment proof, you can find it mostly on their Discord channel, where you can already find payout certificates and payment proof of the first traders who have managed to reach funded status and qualify for their first payouts.

Which Broker Does PipFarm Use?

PipFarm is partnered with TopFX as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with PipFarm, they allow you to trade on cTrader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, PipFarm is partnered with TopFX, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30 (1:50 leverage by reaching the 50 XP milestone), depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDAUD/USD
CAD/CHFCAD/JPYCHF/JPYCHF/PLNCHF/SEKCHF/SGD
DKK/NOKDKK/SEKEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZK
EUR/DKKEUR/GBPEUR/HKDEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/MXN
EUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/SEKEUR/SGDEUR/TRY
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NOK
GBP/NZDGBP/PLNGBP/SEKGBP/SGDGBP/USDNOK/JPY
NOK/SEKNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/SGDNZD/USD
USD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CNHUSD/CZKUSD/DKKUSD/HKD
USD/HUFUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEK
USD/SGDUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/EURXAG/USDXAU/EURXAU/USDWTI
BRENTNGAS

Indices

NED25AUS200GER40US30FR40
UK100SP35JPN225US100US500
SWI20STOXX50IT40

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDXRP/USDBCH/USDDSH/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 6 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 6 USD / LOT (Only Metals)
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

50% Lower Commission ($3 / LOT) by reaching the 10 XP milestone &

Zero Commission ($0 / LOT) by reaching the 50 XP milestone

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
cTraderClick here

Education

PipFarm doesn’t provide any additional educational content to their community.

However, PipFarm offers traders a meticulously designed trading dashboard, facilitating progress tracking, access to trading objectives, and crucial statistics. This feature also enhances risk management for a more seamless trading experience.

PipFarm Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

PipFarm has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, PipFarm has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.6 out of 5 from a pool of 186 reviews. Notably, 88% of these reviews have awarded PipFarm the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first client had a positive experience with PipFarm, expressing trust in the program. They noted that the CEO has a strong reputation, having worked at cTrader for many years, and is well-known in the forex industry. The client advised against using unknown prop firms, suggesting that it could lead to problems.

The second client recently joined PipFarm, drawn to the prop firm because they offer cTrader. Their first impression has been very positive, and they expressed a particular appreciation for the company’s branding.

Social Media Statistics

PipFarm can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter12,400 Followers
Instagram4,916 Followers
LinkedIn300 Followers
Discord5,426 Members
Telegram732 Members
Youtube847 Subscribers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@pipfarm.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form –  Register with PipFarm by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account Size – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 20% discount on both PipFarm account types.
  • Choose Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, Skrill, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, PipFarm is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the Two-step Evaluation, which is a two-step program, and the Static Evaluation and Trailing Evaluation, which are both one-step evaluations.

PipFarm’s Two-step Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 70% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in both evaluation phases to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 9% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase, depending on the account size. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

PipFarm’s Static Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 70% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 12% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have a maximum trading day requirement of 1 year during the evaluation phase. Additionally, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase, depending on the account size. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Static Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

PipFarm’s Trailing Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 70% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 12% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 12% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have a maximum trading day requirement of 1 year during the evaluation phase. Additionally, you are required to have a minimum of 2-5 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase, depending on the account size. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Trailing Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend PipFarm to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as a year-long trading period, a static maximum loss rule on Two-step Evaluation and Static Evaluation, bi-weekly payouts, which can become on-demand payouts, a kill switch feature for easier risk management, and a unique XP ranking feature, providing traders with an opportunity to benefit whenever they reach a certain milestone. After considering everything PipFarm has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of PipFarm was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:40 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on PipFarm and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed PipFarm review by commenting below!

The post PipFarm Review (20% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/pipfarm/feed/ 0